WO2024067807A1 - 通信方法、装置及存储介质 - Google Patents

通信方法、装置及存储介质 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024067807A1
WO2024067807A1 PCT/CN2023/122596 CN2023122596W WO2024067807A1 WO 2024067807 A1 WO2024067807 A1 WO 2024067807A1 CN 2023122596 W CN2023122596 W CN 2023122596W WO 2024067807 A1 WO2024067807 A1 WO 2024067807A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
port
ptrs
dmrs
ports
codeword
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/122596
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
董昶钊
刘显达
高翔
张哲宁
刘鹍鹏
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024067807A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024067807A1/zh

Links

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413—MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456—Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/21—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the uplink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards the network
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • H04W72/231—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal the control data signalling from the layers above the physical layer, e.g. RRC or MAC-CE signalling
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • H04W72/232—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal the control data signalling from the physical layer, e.g. DCI signalling

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method, device and storage medium.
  • the phase tracking reference signal (PTRS) port is associated with the corresponding candidate demodulation reference signal (DMRS) port.
  • DMRS candidate demodulation reference signal
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the present application provides a communication method, device and storage medium to accurately determine the association relationship between a PTRS port and a DMRS port to improve the reliability of communication.
  • a communication method comprising: a terminal receiving codeword indication information, the codeword indication information being used to indicate a first codeword, the first codeword corresponding to at least one first PTRS port; the terminal receiving downlink control information (DCI), the DCI being used to indicate an association relationship between at least one first phase tracking reference signal PTRS port and the at least one first DMRS port, the at least one first DMRS port being a DMRS port corresponding to one or more layers of the first codeword; the terminal determining, from the at least one first DMRS port, a first DMRS port respectively associated with the at least one first PTRS port; and the terminal sending, through the at least one first PTRS port, at least one PTRS signal according to the first DMRS port respectively associated with the at least one first PTRS port.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the association relationship between the PTRS port and the DMRS port can be accurately determined, thereby improving the reliability of communication.
  • the codeword indication information may be independent information from the DCI, or the codeword indication information may be located in the first information together with the DCI, and the terminal determines the first DMRS port associated with the at least one first PTRS port from the at least one first DMRS port according to the first information.
  • the method also includes: the terminal reporting M PTRS ports supported by the terminal; or the terminal receiving first information from a network device, the first information being used to configure the M PTRS ports, where M is a positive integer; and the terminal determining the number of at least one first PTRS port corresponding to the first codeword, where the number of at least one first PTRS port is less than or equal to the M.
  • the terminal receives second information from a network device, where the second information is used to configure Q PTRS ports, where Q is a positive integer, and Q is less than or equal to M.
  • the number of the at least one first PTRS port is the M.
  • the number of at least one first PTRS port corresponding to the first codeword may be M according to the number of layers included in the first codeword.
  • M>1 at least one first DMRS port associated with the first PTRS port is determined according to the DCI, and the DMRS ports associated with the remaining M-1 PTRS ports are preset ports.
  • M 2
  • the first DMRS port associated with one of the two first PTRS ports is determined according to the DCI
  • the first DMRS port associated with the other of the two first PTRS ports is a preset port.
  • the first DMRS port associated with a first PTRS port can be indicated by DCI; if there is only one first DMRS port associated with another first PTRS port, the first DMRS port associated with the first PTRS port is a preset port.
  • the number of the first DMRS ports associated with the other first PTRS port of the two first PTRS ports is 1.
  • the first codeword corresponds to N first PTRS ports, N ⁇ M
  • the terminal determines a second DMRS port associated with each of the R second PTRS ports, and the second DMRS port is a DMRS port predefined, preconfigured, or obtained according to a default rule in the second codeword.
  • the terminal can determine the first DMRS port corresponding to the first PTRS port based on the DCI, the second codeword corresponds to R second PTRS ports, and the second DMRS ports associated with each of the R second PRS ports are predefined, preconfigured or obtained according to default rules.
  • N N1
  • at least one first DMRS port associated with the first PTRS port is determined according to the DCI, and the DMRS ports associated with the remaining N-1 PTRS ports are preset ports.
  • the second DMRS port is the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword, or the second DMRS port is the DMRS port with the largest port number in the second codeword, or the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword can be used as a candidate DMRS port for the first PTRS port, or the DMRS port with the largest port number in the second codeword can be used as a candidate DMRS port for the first PTRS port.
  • the codeword indication information includes a modulation and coding scheme MCS corresponding to each codeword in a plurality of codewords, and the first codeword is a codeword corresponding to a maximum MCS in the plurality of codewords.
  • At least one first PTRS port corresponding to the codeword corresponding to the largest MCS among multiple codewords is determined, and a PTRS signal is sent according to the first DMRS port associated with the at least one first PTRS port, which can improve the reliability of the PTRS signal.
  • the DCI also includes at least one of the following information: the rank of the uplink physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, TPMI; the method also includes: the terminal determines at least one first PTRS port corresponding to the first codeword based on the rank and/or TPMI of the uplink PUSCH.
  • the TPMI corresponds to a precoding matrix
  • the precoding matrix includes X PUSCH/SRS ports and Y data layers, each data layer corresponds to a DMRS port, the X is greater than 4, and/or the Y is greater than 4.
  • the X PUSCH/SRS ports are reported by the terminal or configured by a network device, and the X PUSCH/SRS ports are associated with the M PTRS ports according to a predefined rule.
  • the first codeword further corresponds to at least one antenna coherence group.
  • the M is greater than or equal to 2, and the number of the first PTRS ports is less than or equal to the number of the antenna coherence groups.
  • a communication method comprising: a network device sends codeword indication information, the codeword indication information is used to indicate a first codeword, the first codeword corresponds to at least one first phase tracking reference signal PTRS port; the network device sends downlink control information DCI, the DCI is used to indicate an association relationship between at least one first phase tracking reference signal PTRS port and the at least one first DMRS port, the at least one first DMRS port being a DMRS port corresponding to one or more layers of the first codeword; and the network device receives at least one PTRS signal through the at least one first PTRS port according to the first DMRS port respectively associated with the at least one first PTRS port.
  • the association relationship between the PTRS port and the DMRS port can be accurately determined, thereby improving the reliability of communication.
  • the codeword indication information may be independent information from the DCI, or the codeword indication information may be located in the same first information as the DCI.
  • the method further includes: the network device receiving M PTRS ports supported by the terminal reported by the terminal; or the network device sending first information, wherein the first information is used to configure the M PTRS ports; wherein M is a positive integer.
  • the number of the at least one first PTRS port is the M.
  • M>1 at least one first DMRS port associated with the first PTRS port is determined according to the DCI, and the DMRS ports associated with the remaining M-1 PTRS ports are preset ports.
  • the M 2
  • the first DMRS port associated with one of the two first PTRS ports is determined according to the DCI
  • the first DMRS port associated with the other of the two first PTRS ports is Default port.
  • the number of the first DMRS ports associated with the other first PTRS port of the two first PTRS ports is 1.
  • the first codeword corresponds to N first PTRS ports, where N ⁇ M
  • N N1
  • at least one first DMRS port associated with the first PTRS port is determined according to the DCI, and the DMRS ports associated with the remaining N-1 PTRS ports are preset ports.
  • the second DMRS port is a DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword.
  • the codeword indication information includes a modulation and coding scheme MCS corresponding to each codeword in a plurality of codewords, and the first codeword is a codeword corresponding to a maximum MCS in the plurality of codewords.
  • the DCI also includes at least one of the following information: the rank of the uplink physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, TPMI; the TPMI corresponds to a precoding matrix, the precoding matrix includes X PUSCH/SRS ports, and Y data layers, each data layer corresponds to a DMRS port, the X is greater than 4, and/or the Y is greater than 4.
  • the X PUSCH/SRS ports are reported by the terminal or configured by a network device, and the X PUSCH/SRS ports are associated with the M PTRS ports according to a predefined rule.
  • the first codeword further corresponds to at least one antenna coherence group.
  • the M is greater than or equal to 2, and the number of the first PTRS ports is less than or equal to the number of the antenna coherence groups.
  • a communication method comprising: a terminal receives downlink control information DCI, the DCI being used to indicate an association relationship between at least one phase tracking reference signal PTRS port and at least one demodulation reference signal DMRS port, each of the at least one PTRS port corresponds to a plurality of antenna coherence groups, each of the plurality of antenna coherence groups corresponds to a plurality of physical uplink shared channel PUSCH ports, or each of the plurality of antenna coherence groups corresponds to a plurality of sounding reference signal SRS ports; the terminal determines, from the at least one DMRS port according to the DCI, a DMRS port respectively associated with the at least one PTRS port; and the terminal sends, through the at least one first PTRS port, at least one PTRS signal according to the DMRS port respectively associated with the at least one PTRS port.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • DMRS port corresponds to a plurality of antenna coherence groups
  • the association relationship between the PTRS port and the DMRS port and the PUSCH/SRS port can be accurately determined, thereby improving the reliability of communication.
  • the method further includes: the terminal reporting M PTRS ports supported by the terminal; or the terminal receiving first information from a network device, where the first information is used to configure the M PTRS ports, and M is a positive integer.
  • the DCI further includes at least one of the following information: the rank of an uplink physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, and TPMI; the method further includes: the terminal determining the at least one PTRS port according to the rank and/or TPMI of the uplink PUSCH.
  • the TPMI corresponds to a precoding matrix
  • the precoding matrix includes X PUSCH/SRS ports and Y data layers, each data layer corresponds to a DMRS port, the X is greater than 4, and/or the Y is greater than 4.
  • the X PUSCH/SRS ports are reported by the terminal or configured by a network device, and the X PUSCH/SRS ports are associated with the M PTRS ports according to a predefined rule.
  • the number of antenna coherence groups is 4, and the number of PTRS ports is 2, one PTRS port corresponds to the first antenna coherence group and the second antenna coherence group, and the other PTRS port corresponds to the third antenna coherence group and the fourth antenna coherence group; each of the 4 antenna coherence groups corresponds to 2 PUSCH ports, or each of the 4 antenna coherence groups corresponds to 2 SRS ports.
  • the method also includes: the terminal receives codeword indication information, the codeword indication information is used to indicate a first codeword, and the first codeword corresponds to at least one first PTRS port among the M PTRS ports; the terminal determines, from the at least one first DMRS port, a first DMRS port associated with each of the at least one first PTRS port based on the codeword indication information and the DCI; and the terminal sends at least one PTRS signal based on the first DMRS port associated with each of the at least one first PTRS port.
  • the codeword indication information may be independent information from the DCI, or the codeword indication information may be located in the first information together with the DCI, and the terminal determines the first DMRS port associated with the at least one first PTRS port from the at least one first DMRS port according to the first information.
  • the method further includes: the terminal determining the number of at least one first PTRS port corresponding to the first codeword, and the number of the at least one first PTRS port is less than or equal to the M.
  • the number of the at least one first PTRS port is the M.
  • M 2
  • a first DMRS port associated with one first PTRS port is determined according to the DCI
  • a first DMRS port associated with another first PTRS port is a preset port.
  • the first codeword corresponds to N first PTRS ports, N ⁇ M
  • the terminal determines a second DMRS port associated with each of the R second PTRS ports, and the second DMRS port is a DMRS port predefined, preconfigured, or obtained according to a default rule in the second codeword.
  • the second DMRS port is the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword, or the second DMRS port is the DMRS port with the largest port number in the second codeword, or the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword can be used as a candidate DMRS port for the first PTRS port, or the DMRS port with the largest port number in the second codeword can be used as a candidate DMRS port for the first PTRS port.
  • the codeword indication information includes a modulation and coding scheme MCS corresponding to each codeword in a plurality of codewords, and the first codeword is a codeword corresponding to a maximum MCS in the plurality of codewords.
  • the first codeword further corresponds to at least one antenna coherence group.
  • a communication method comprising: a network device sends downlink control information DCI, the DCI being used to indicate an association relationship between at least one phase tracking reference signal PTRS port and at least one demodulation reference signal DMRS port, each of the at least one PTRS port corresponds to multiple antenna coherence groups, each of the multiple antenna coherence groups corresponds to multiple physical uplink shared channel PUSCH ports, or each of the multiple antenna coherence groups corresponds to multiple sounding reference signal SRS ports; and the network device receives at least one PTRS signal through the at least one first PTRS port according to the DMRS ports respectively associated with the at least one PTRS port.
  • the association relationship between the PTRS port and the DMRS port and the PUSCH/SRS port can be accurately determined, thereby improving the reliability of communication.
  • the method further includes: the network device receiving M PTRS ports supported by the terminal reported by the terminal; or the network device sending first information, wherein the first information is used to configure the M PTRS ports; wherein M is a positive integer.
  • the DCI also includes at least one of the following information: the rank of the uplink physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, TPMI; the TPMI corresponds to a precoding matrix, the precoding matrix includes X PUSCH/SRS ports, and Y data layers, each data layer corresponds to a DMRS port, the X is greater than 4, and/or the Y is greater than 4.
  • the X PUSCH/SRS ports are reported by the terminal or configured by a network device, and the X PUSCH/SRS ports are associated with the M PTRS ports according to a predefined rule.
  • the method also includes: the network device sends codeword indication information, the codeword indication information is used to indicate a first codeword, and the first codeword corresponds to at least one first phase tracking reference signal PTRS port; the DCI is used to indicate an association relationship between at least one first phase tracking reference signal PTRS port and the at least one first DMRS port, and the at least one first DMRS port is a DMRS port corresponding to one or more layers of the first codeword; the network device receives at least one PTRS signal according to the first DMRS port associated with each of the at least one first PTRS port.
  • the codeword indication information may be independent information from the DCI, or the codeword indication information may be located in the same first information as the DCI.
  • the number of the at least one first PTRS port is the M.
  • the first codeword corresponds to N first PTRS ports, where N ⁇ M
  • the codeword indication information includes a modulation and coding scheme MCS corresponding to each codeword in a plurality of codewords, and the first codeword is a codeword corresponding to a maximum MCS in the plurality of codewords.
  • the first codeword further corresponds to at least one antenna coherence group.
  • the M is greater than or equal to 2
  • the number of the first PTRS ports is less than or equal to the antenna coherence The number of groups.
  • the method also includes: the network device sends codeword indication information to the terminal, the codeword indication information is used to indicate a first codeword, and the first codeword corresponds to at least one first PTRS port among the M PTRS ports; the network device receives at least one PTRS signal based on the first DMRS port associated with each of the at least one first PTRS port.
  • a communication device can implement the method in the first aspect.
  • the communication device can be a terminal or a chip system of a terminal.
  • the method can be implemented by software, hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the device includes: a transceiver unit and a processing unit; wherein: the transceiver unit is used to receive codeword indication information, the codeword indication information is used to indicate a first codeword, and the first codeword corresponds to at least one first PTRS port; the transceiver unit is also used to receive DCI, the DCI is used to indicate the association relationship between at least one first phase tracking reference signal PTRS port and the at least one first DMRS port, and the at least one first DMRS port is a DMRS port corresponding to one or more layers of the first codeword; the processing unit is used to determine, from the at least one first DMRS port, the first DMRS port associated with each of the at least one first PTRS port according to the codeword indication information and the DCI; and the transceiver unit is also used to send at least one PTRS signal through the at least one first PTRS port according to the first DMRS port associated with each of the at least one first PTRS port.
  • the codeword indication information may be independent information from the DCI, or the codeword indication information may be located in the first information together with the DCI, and the terminal determines the first DMRS port associated with the at least one first PTRS port from the at least one first DMRS port according to the first information.
  • the transceiver unit is further used to report the M PTRS ports supported by the terminal; or the transceiver unit is further used to receive first information from a network device, the first information being used to configure the M PTRS ports, where M is a positive integer; and the processing unit is further used to determine the number of at least one first PTRS port corresponding to the first codeword, where the number of the at least one first PTRS port is less than or equal to the M.
  • the transceiver unit is further used to receive second information from a network device, where the second information is used to configure Q PTRS ports, where Q is a positive integer and is less than or equal to M.
  • the number of the at least one first PTRS port is M.
  • At least one first DMRS port associated with the first PTRS port is determined according to the DCI, and the DMRS ports associated with the remaining M-1 PTRS ports are preset ports.
  • the first DMRS port associated with one of the two first PTRS ports is determined according to the DCI, and the first DMRS port associated with the other of the two first PTRS ports is a preset port.
  • the number of first DMRS ports associated with another first PTRS port of the two first PTRS ports is 1.
  • the first codeword corresponds to N first PTRS ports, N ⁇ M
  • the processing unit is also used to determine a second DMRS port associated with each of the R second PTRS ports, and the second DMRS port is a DMRS port predefined, preconfigured or obtained according to a default rule in the second codeword.
  • At least one first DMRS port associated with the first PTRS port is determined according to the DCI, and the DMRS ports associated with the remaining N-1 PTRS ports are preset ports.
  • the first DMRS ports associated with the other two of the three first PTRS ports are preset ports
  • the number of first DMRS ports associated with each of the other two of the three first PTRS ports is 1
  • the second DMRS port is the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword, or the second DMRS port is the DMRS port with the largest port number in the second codeword, or the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword can be used as a candidate DMRS port for the first PTRS port, or the DMRS port with the largest port number in the second codeword can be used as a candidate DMRS port for the first PTRS port.
  • the codeword indication information includes a modulation and coding scheme MCS corresponding to each codeword in a plurality of codewords, and the first codeword is a codeword corresponding to a maximum MCS in the plurality of codewords.
  • the DCI also includes at least one of the following information: the rank of the uplink physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, TPMI; the processing unit is further used to determine at least one first PTRS port corresponding to the first codeword according to the rank and/or TPMI of the uplink PUSCH.
  • the TPMI corresponds to a precoding matrix
  • the precoding matrix includes X PUSCH/SRS ports and Y data layers, each data layer corresponds to a DMRS port, the X is greater than 4, and/or the Y is greater than 4.
  • the X PUSCH/SRS ports are reported by the terminal or configured by a network device, and the X PUSCH/SRS ports are associated with the M PTRS ports according to a predefined rule.
  • the first codeword also corresponds to at least one antenna coherence group.
  • the M is greater than or equal to 2, and the number of the first PTRS ports is less than or equal to the number of the antenna coherence groups.
  • a communication device can implement the method in the second aspect.
  • the communication device can be a network device or a chip system in a network device.
  • the method can be implemented by software, hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the device includes: a transceiver unit, and may also include a processing unit; wherein: the transceiver unit is used to send codeword indication information, the codeword indication information is used to indicate a first codeword, and the first codeword corresponds to at least one first phase tracking reference signal PTRS port; the transceiver unit is also used to send downlink control information DCI, the DCI is used to indicate the association relationship between at least one first phase tracking reference signal PTRS port and the at least one first DMRS port, and the at least one first DMRS port is a DMRS port corresponding to one or more layers of the first codeword; and the transceiver unit is also used to receive at least one PTRS signal through the at least one first PTRS port according to the first DMRS port associated with each of the at least one first PTRS ports.
  • the transceiver unit is used to send codeword indication information, the codeword indication information is used to indicate a first codeword, and the first codeword corresponds to at least one first phase tracking
  • the codeword indication information may be independent information from the DCI, or the codeword indication information may be located in the same first information as the DCI.
  • the transceiver unit is further used to receive M PTRS ports supported by the terminal reported by the terminal; or the transceiver unit is further used to send first information, and the first information is used to configure the M PTRS ports; wherein M is a positive integer.
  • the number of the at least one first PTRS port is M.
  • At least one first DMRS port associated with the first PTRS port is determined according to the DCI, and the DMRS ports associated with the remaining M-1 PTRS ports are preset ports.
  • the first DMRS port associated with one of the two first PTRS ports is determined according to the DCI, and the first DMRS port associated with the other of the two first PTRS ports is a preset port.
  • the number of first DMRS ports associated with another first PTRS port of the two first PTRS ports is 1.
  • the first codeword corresponds to N first PTRS ports, N ⁇ M
  • N and R are positive integers.
  • At least one first DMRS port associated with the first PTRS port is determined according to the DCI, and the DMRS ports associated with the remaining N-1 PTRS ports are preset ports.
  • the first DMRS ports associated with the other two of the three first PTRS ports are preset ports
  • the number of first DMRS ports associated with each of the other two of the three first PTRS ports is 1
  • the second DMRS port is a DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword.
  • the codeword indication information includes a modulation and coding scheme MCS corresponding to each codeword in a plurality of codewords, and the first codeword is a codeword corresponding to a maximum MCS in the plurality of codewords.
  • the DCI also includes at least one of the following information: the rank of the uplink physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, TPMI; the TPMI corresponds to a precoding matrix, the precoding matrix includes X PUSCH/SRS ports, and Y data layers, each data layer corresponds to a DMRS port, the X is greater than 4, and/or the Y is greater than 4.
  • the X PUSCH/SRS ports are reported by the terminal or configured by a network device, and the X PUSCH/SRS ports are associated with the M PTRS ports according to a predefined rule.
  • the first codeword also corresponds to at least one antenna coherence group.
  • the M is greater than or equal to 2, and the number of the first PTRS ports is less than or equal to the number of the antenna coherence groups.
  • a communication device may implement the method in the third aspect.
  • the communication device may be a terminal or a chip system of a terminal.
  • the method may be implemented by software, hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the device includes: a transceiver unit and a processing unit; wherein: the transceiver unit is used to receive downlink control information DCI, the DCI is used to indicate the association relationship between at least one phase tracking reference signal PTRS port and at least one demodulation reference signal DMRS port, each PTRS port in the at least one PTRS port corresponds to multiple antenna coherence groups, and the multiple antennas are coherent.
  • the transceiver unit is used to receive downlink control information DCI
  • the DCI is used to indicate the association relationship between at least one phase tracking reference signal PTRS port and at least one demodulation reference signal DMRS port
  • each PTRS port in the at least one PTRS port corresponds to multiple antenna coherence groups, and the multiple antennas are coherent.
  • Each antenna coherence group in the group corresponds to multiple physical uplink shared channel PUSCH ports, or each antenna coherence group in the multiple antenna coherence groups corresponds to multiple sounding reference signal SRS ports;
  • the processing unit is used to determine the DMRS ports associated with the at least one PTRS port from the at least one DMRS port according to the DCI; and the transceiver unit is also used to send at least one PTRS signal through the at least one first PTRS port according to the DMRS ports associated with the at least one PTRS port.
  • the transceiver unit is further used to report M PTRS ports supported by the terminal; or the transceiver unit is further used to receive first information from a network device, wherein the first information is used to configure the M PTRS ports, and M is a positive integer.
  • the DCI further includes at least one of the following information: a rank of an uplink physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, and TPMI; the processing unit is further configured to determine the at least one PTRS port according to the rank and/or TPMI of the uplink PUSCH.
  • the TPMI corresponds to a precoding matrix
  • the precoding matrix includes X PUSCH/SRS ports and Y data layers, each data layer corresponds to a DMRS port, the X is greater than 4, and/or the Y is greater than 4.
  • the X PUSCH/SRS ports are reported by the terminal or configured by a network device, and the X PUSCH/SRS ports are associated with the M PTRS ports according to a predefined rule.
  • the number of antenna coherence groups is 4, and the number of PTRS ports is 2, one PTRS port corresponds to the first antenna coherence group and the second antenna coherence group, and the other PTRS port corresponds to the third antenna coherence group and the fourth antenna coherence group; each of the 4 antenna coherence groups corresponds to 2 PUSCH ports, or each of the 4 antenna coherence groups corresponds to 2 SRS ports.
  • the transceiver unit is further used to receive codeword indication information, wherein the codeword indication information is used to indicate a first codeword, and the first codeword corresponds to at least one first PTRS port among the M PTRS ports; the processing unit is further used to determine, from the at least one first DMRS port, a first DMRS port associated with each of the at least one first PTRS ports based on the codeword indication information and the DCI; and the transceiver unit is further used to send at least one PTRS signal based on the first DMRS port associated with each of the at least one first PTRS port.
  • the codeword indication information may be independent information from the DCI, or the codeword indication information may be located in the first information together with the DCI, and the terminal determines the first DMRS port associated with the at least one first PTRS port from the at least one first DMRS port according to the first information.
  • the processing unit is further used to determine the number of at least one first PTRS port corresponding to the first codeword, and the number of the at least one first PTRS port is less than or equal to the M.
  • the number of the at least one first PTRS port is M.
  • a first DMRS port associated with a first PTRS port is determined according to the DCI, and a first DMRS port associated with another first PTRS port is a preset port.
  • the first codeword corresponds to N first PTRS ports, N ⁇ M
  • the terminal determines a second DMRS port associated with each of the R second PTRS ports, and the second DMRS port is a DMRS port predefined, preconfigured, or obtained according to a default rule in the second codeword.
  • the second DMRS port is the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword, or the second DMRS port is the DMRS port with the largest port number in the second codeword, or the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword can be used as a candidate DMRS port for the first PTRS port, or the DMRS port with the largest port number in the second codeword can be used as a candidate DMRS port for the first PTRS port.
  • the codeword indication information includes a modulation and coding scheme MCS corresponding to each codeword in a plurality of codewords, and the first codeword is a codeword corresponding to a maximum MCS in the plurality of codewords.
  • the first codeword also corresponds to at least one antenna coherence group.
  • a communication device may implement the method in the fourth aspect.
  • the communication device may be a network device or a chip system in a network device.
  • the method may be implemented by software, hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the device includes: a transceiver unit, and may also include a processing unit; wherein: the transceiver unit is used to send downlink control information DCI, the DCI is used to indicate the association relationship between at least one phase tracking reference signal PTRS port and at least one demodulation reference signal DMRS port, each of the at least one PTRS port corresponds to multiple antenna coherence groups, each of the multiple antenna coherence groups corresponds to multiple physical uplink shared channel PUSCH ports, or each of the multiple antenna coherence groups corresponds to multiple sounding reference signal SRS ports; and the transceiver unit is also used to receive at least one PTRS signal through the at least one first PTRS port according to the DMRS port associated with each of the at least one PTRS port.
  • the transceiver unit is used to send downlink control information DCI
  • the DCI is used to indicate the association relationship between at least one phase tracking reference signal PTRS port and at least one demodulation reference signal DMRS port
  • the transceiver unit is further used to receive M PTRS ports supported by the terminal reported by the terminal; or the transceiver unit is further used to send first information, and the first information is used to configure the M PTRS ports; wherein M is a positive integer.
  • the DCI also includes at least one of the following information: the rank of the uplink physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, TPMI; the TPMI corresponds to a precoding matrix, the precoding matrix includes X PUSCH/SRS ports, and Y data layers, each data layer corresponds to a DMRS port, the X is greater than 4, and/or the Y is greater than 4.
  • the X PUSCH/SRS ports are reported by the terminal or configured by a network device, and the X PUSCH/SRS ports are associated with the M PTRS ports according to a predefined rule.
  • the transceiver unit is also used to send codeword indication information, wherein the codeword indication information is used to indicate a first codeword, wherein the first codeword corresponds to at least one first phase tracking reference signal PTRS port; the DCI is used to indicate an association relationship between at least one first phase tracking reference signal PTRS port and the at least one first DMRS port, wherein the at least one first DMRS port is a DMRS port corresponding to one or more layers of the first codeword; the transceiver unit is also used to receive at least one PTRS signal according to the first DMRS port respectively associated with the at least one first PTRS port.
  • the codeword indication information is used to indicate a first codeword, wherein the first codeword corresponds to at least one first phase tracking reference signal PTRS port
  • the DCI is used to indicate an association relationship between at least one first phase tracking reference signal PTRS port and the at least one first DMRS port, wherein the at least one first DMRS port is a DMRS port corresponding to
  • the codeword indication information may be independent information from the DCI, or the codeword indication information may be located in the same first information as the DCI.
  • the number of the at least one first PTRS port is M.
  • the first codeword corresponds to N first PTRS ports, N ⁇ M
  • N and R are positive integers.
  • the codeword indication information includes a modulation and coding scheme MCS corresponding to each codeword in a plurality of codewords, and the first codeword is a codeword corresponding to a maximum MCS in the plurality of codewords.
  • the first codeword also corresponds to at least one antenna coherence group.
  • the M is greater than or equal to 2, and the number of the first PTRS ports is less than or equal to the number of the antenna coherence groups.
  • the transceiver unit is further used to send codeword indication information to the terminal, wherein the codeword indication information is used to indicate a first codeword, and the first codeword corresponds to at least one first PTRS port among the M PTRS ports; the transceiver unit is also used to receive at least one PTRS signal based on a first DMRS port associated with each of the at least one first PTRS port.
  • the communication device includes a processor coupled to a memory; the processor is configured to support the device in executing the corresponding functions in the communication method.
  • the memory is coupled to the processor, and stores the necessary computer programs (or computer executable instructions) and/or data for the device.
  • the communication device may also include a communication interface to support communication between the device and other network elements, such as the sending or receiving of data and/or signals.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, circuit, bus, module or other type of communication interface.
  • the memory may be located inside the communication device and integrated with the processor; it may also be located outside the communication device.
  • the communication device includes a processor and a transceiver, the processor is coupled to the transceiver, and the processor is used to execute a computer program or instruction to control the transceiver to receive and send information; when the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the processor is also used to implement the above method through a logic circuit or execute code instructions.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, an interface circuit or an input-output interface, which is used to receive signals from other communication devices other than the communication device and transmit them to the processor or send signals from the processor to other communication devices other than the communication device.
  • the transceiver is a transceiver circuit or an input-output interface.
  • the sending unit may be an output unit, such as an output circuit or a communication interface; the receiving unit may be an input unit, such as an input circuit or a communication interface.
  • the sending unit may be a transmitter or a transmitter; the receiving unit may be a receiver or a receiver.
  • the codeword indication information includes a modulation and coding scheme MCS corresponding to each of the two codewords, and when the MCSs corresponding to the two codewords are equal, the first codeword is a preset codeword.
  • the two codewords are codeword 0 and codeword 1, respectively, and the preset codeword is codeword 0.
  • the codeword indication information includes a modulation and coding scheme MCS corresponding to each codeword in the two codewords, and when the MCSs corresponding to the two codewords are equal, the DMRS port included in the first codeword is associated with more PTRS ports than the DMRS port included in the other codeword of the two codewords.
  • the The codeword indication information includes a modulation and coding scheme MCS corresponding to each codeword in the two codewords.
  • MCSs corresponding to the two codewords are equal
  • the first codeword is a codeword with more PTRS ports associated with the DMRS ports included in the two codewords.
  • the MCSs corresponding to the two codewords are equal, and the number of PTRS ports associated with the DMRS ports included in the two codewords is also equal, the first codeword is a preset codeword.
  • the two codewords are codeword 0 and codeword 1, respectively, and the preset codeword is codeword 0.
  • the codeword indication information includes a modulation and coding scheme MCS corresponding to each codeword in the two codewords.
  • MCSs corresponding to the two codewords are equal, if the DMRS port corresponding to the layer included in codeword 0 of the two codewords is used as a candidate DMRS port for the first PTRS port, the number of the first PTRS ports is M0; if the DMRS port corresponding to the layer included in codeword 1 is used as a candidate DMRS port for the first PTRS port, the number of the first PTRS ports is M1; if M1>M0, the first codeword is codeword 1; otherwise, the first codeword is codeword 0.
  • a communication system comprising the communication device as described in the fifth aspect and the communication device as described in the sixth aspect.
  • a communication system comprising the communication device as described in the seventh aspect and the communication device as described in the eighth aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored.
  • the program or instruction is executed by a processor, the method described in any aspect or any implementation of the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, the fourth aspect is executed.
  • a computer program product which, when executed on a computing device, enables the method described in any aspect or any implementation of the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, the fourth aspect to be executed.
  • a circuit is provided, the circuit is coupled to a memory, and the circuit is used to execute the method described in any one of the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and the fourth aspect or any implementation thereof.
  • the circuit may include a chip circuit.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system involved in the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of DMRS configuration types
  • FIG3 is a schematic diagram of frequency division duplexing-orthogonal mask expansion of DMRS ports
  • FIG4 is a flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG5a is a schematic diagram of an association between a PTRS port and a PUSCH port according to an example provided in an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG5b is a schematic diagram of association between a PTRS port and a PUSCH port according to another example provided in an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG6a is a schematic diagram of association between a PTRS port and a PUSCH port according to another example provided in an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG6b is a schematic diagram of association between a PTRS port and a PUSCH port according to another example provided in an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG7 is a schematic diagram of the association between a PTRS port and a PUSCH port according to another example provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG8 is a flow chart of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG9a is a schematic diagram of PTRS-DMRS association when there are 8 streams in an example provided by an embodiment of the present application and the number of PTRS ports is 2;
  • FIG9 b is a schematic diagram of PTRS-DMRS association when there are 8 streams in another example provided by an embodiment of the present application and the number of PTRS ports is 2;
  • FIG9c is a schematic diagram of PTRS-DMRS association when there are 8 streams and the number of PTRS ports is 2 in another example provided in an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG10 is a schematic diagram of PTRS-DMRS association for 6 streams according to an example provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG11 is a schematic diagram of PTRS-DMRS association for four streams according to an example provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG12a is a schematic diagram of PTRS-DMRS association when there are 8 streams in an example provided by an embodiment of the present application and the number of PTRS ports is 4;
  • FIG12b is a schematic diagram of PTRS-DMRS association when there are 8 streams and the number of PTRS ports is 4 in another example provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG13 is a flow chart of another communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG14a is a schematic diagram of another PTRS-DMRS association according to an example of an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG14b is a schematic diagram of another PTRS-DMRS association according to an example of an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG14c is a schematic diagram of another PTRS-DMRS association according to an example of an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG15 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG16 is a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of a terminal provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG17 is a schematic diagram of a simplified structure of a network device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG18 is a schematic diagram of the structure of another communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the technical solution provided in this application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: long term evolution (LTE) system, fifth generation (5G) communication system (or new radio (NR) system) and other future communication systems such as sixth generation (6G) communication system.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • 5G fifth generation
  • NR new radio
  • 6G sixth generation
  • the technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to Internet of Things (IoT) system, narrowband Internet of Things (NB-IoT) system, etc.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • NB-IoT narrowband Internet of Things
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system involved in the present application.
  • the communication system includes at least one network device and at least one terminal.
  • a network device and multiple terminals (user equipment (UE) 1 to UE5 are shown as examples in the figure) form a communication system.
  • UE1 to UE5 can communicate with the network device, and its link environment includes uplink, downlink and side-link transmission.
  • the information transmitted in the link includes the actual transmitted data information and the control information used to indicate or schedule the actual data.
  • UE3, UE4 and UE5 can also form a communication system, and its link transmission environment is consistent with the above, and the specific information interaction depends on the configuration method of the network.
  • the above-mentioned network device may be a device that can communicate with a terminal.
  • the network device may be any device with wireless transceiver functions. Including but not limited to: base stations such as NodeB, evolved base stations, such as evolved NodeB (eNodeB), base stations in the fifth generation (5G) communication system, base stations or network devices in future communication systems, access nodes in WiFi systems, wireless relay nodes, wireless backhaul nodes, etc.
  • the network device may also be a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario.
  • the network device may also be a small station, a transmission reference point (TRP), etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the network device.
  • the network device may also be an access node, a wireless relay node, a wireless backhaul node, etc. in a wireless local area network (wireless fidelity, WiFi) system.
  • the network device may also be a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario.
  • the base station may include a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU).
  • the CU can also be divided into a CU-control plane (CP) and a CU-user plane (UP).
  • the base station can also be an open radio access network (ORAN) architecture, etc. This application does not limit the specific deployment method of the base station.
  • the above-mentioned terminal is a device with wireless transceiver function, which can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld, wearable or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on the water surface, such as on a ship; it can also be deployed in the air, such as on an airplane, a balloon and a satellite.
  • the terminal device can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in self-driving, a wireless terminal in remote medical, a wireless terminal in smart grid, a wireless terminal in transportation safety, a wireless terminal in smart city, a wireless terminal in smart home, etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the application scenarios.
  • the terminal device may sometimes also be called user equipment, access terminal equipment, UE unit, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal equipment, mobile device, terminal, wireless communication equipment, UE agent or UE device, etc.
  • terminals can also communicate with each other through device-to-device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X) or machine-to-machine (M2M) technologies.
  • D2D device-to-device
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • M2M machine-to-machine
  • system and “network” in the embodiments of the present application may be used interchangeably.
  • DMRS is used to estimate the equivalent channel matrix experienced by a data channel (such as the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) or the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH)) or a control channel (such as the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) or the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH)) for data detection and demodulation.
  • a data channel such as the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) or the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH)
  • a control channel such as the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) or the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH)
  • PUSCH physical uplink control channel
  • PDCH physical downlink control channel
  • the corresponding received signal vector at the receiving end can be It can be expressed as:
  • the receiver can obtain the equivalent channel using a channel estimation algorithm (such as least squares (LS) channel estimation, minimum mean square error (MMSE) channel estimation, etc.) Estimation. MIMO equalization and subsequent demodulation of data signals can be completed based on the equivalent channel.
  • a channel estimation algorithm such as least squares (LS) channel estimation, minimum mean square error (MMSE) channel estimation, etc.
  • DMRS Downlink Reference Signal
  • R the number of transmission streams
  • one DMRS port corresponds to one spatial layer.
  • One DMRS port corresponds to a group of DMRS symbols, or to a group of DMRS sequences.
  • the DMRS symbol contains multiple DMRS symbol elements, which are mapped to corresponding time-frequency resources for transmission.
  • the corresponding number of DMRS ports is R.
  • different DMRS ports are usually orthogonal ports.
  • the DMRS symbols corresponding to different DMRS ports are orthogonal in at least one of the frequency domain, time-frequency or code domain.
  • transmission layer number and “rank” have the same meaning and can be used interchangeably.
  • antenna port and DMRS port have the same meaning and can be used interchangeably.
  • DMRS resources corresponding to multiple DMRS ports are often mapped to the preset time-frequency resources through frequency division multiplexing (FDM), time division multiplexing (TDM) or code division multiplexing (CDM).
  • FDM frequency division multiplexing
  • TDM time division multiplexing
  • CDM code division multiplexing
  • 5G NR supports two types of DMRS resource mapping. For Type 1 DMRS, a maximum of 8 orthogonal ports can be supported; for Type 2 DMRS, a maximum of 12 orthogonal ports can be supported.
  • For a DMRS port in order to perform channel estimation for different time-frequency resources and ensure the quality of channel estimation, multiple DMRS symbols need to be sent in multiple time-frequency resources.
  • DMRS can occupy at least one orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol in the time domain, and the bandwidth occupied in the frequency domain is the same as the scheduling bandwidth of the scheduled data signal.
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • Multiple DMRS symbols corresponding to a port correspond to a reference signal sequence, and a reference signal sequence includes multiple reference signal sequence elements.
  • the DMRS reference signal sequence may be a gold sequence. Taking the DMRS reference signal sequence as a gold sequence as an example, the nth element r(n) in the reference signal sequence may be generated by the following formula:
  • the pseudo-random sequence c(n) may be a gold sequence with a sequence length of 31.
  • N C 1600.
  • the second m-sequence x 2 (n) is initialized by the parameter c init .
  • c init can be defined as:
  • l represents the OFDM symbol index contained in a time slot, Represents the time slot index within a system frame, Can be configured by higher layer signaling.
  • ID which can usually be equal to the cell ID. It is an initialization parameter and its value can be 0 or 1.
  • ⁇ represents the code division multiplexing group index corresponding to the DMRS port.
  • the DMRS reference signal sequence corresponding to a port is mapped to the corresponding time-frequency resource after being multiplied by the corresponding mask sequence through the preset time-frequency resource mapping rule.
  • two types of DMRS configuration methods are defined, including Type 1 DMRS and Type 2 DMRS.
  • the mth reference sequence element r(m) in the corresponding reference signal sequence is mapped to the resource element with index (k,l) p, ⁇ according to the following rules:
  • the RE with index (k,l) p, ⁇ corresponds to the OFDM symbol with index l in a time slot in the time domain and to the subcarrier with index k in the frequency domain.
  • the values of w f (k′), w t (l′), and ⁇ corresponding to the DMRS port p can be determined according to Table 1:
  • type 1 DMRS can support a maximum of 8 orthogonal ports (1000 ⁇ 1007), p represents the DMRS port number, ⁇ represents the code division multiplexing group index corresponding to the DMRS port, ⁇ is the subcarrier offset factor, w t (l′) is the time domain mask element corresponding to the OFDM symbol indexed as l′, and w f (k′) is the frequency domain mask element corresponding to the subcarrier indexed as k′.
  • Type 2 DMRS can support up to 12 orthogonal ports (1000-1011), ⁇ is the index of the code division multiplexing group to which port p belongs, and the DMRS ports in the same code division multiplexing group occupy the same time-frequency resources.
  • ⁇ is the index of the code division multiplexing group to which port p belongs
  • the DMRS ports in the same code division multiplexing group occupy the same time-frequency resources.
  • CDM group 0 contains port 0 and port 1
  • CDM group 1 contains port 2 and port 3.
  • CDM group 0 and CDM group 1 are frequency division multiplexing (mapped on different frequency domain resources).
  • the DMRS ports contained in the CDM group are mapped on the same time-frequency resources.
  • the reference signals corresponding to the DMRS ports contained in the CDM group are distinguished by orthogonal cover code (OCC), thereby ensuring the orthogonality of the DMRS ports in the CDM group, thereby suppressing the interference between DMRS transmitted on different antenna ports.
  • OCC orthogonal cover code
  • port 0 and port 1 are located in the same RE, and resource mapping is performed in a comb-tooth manner in the frequency domain, that is, the adjacent frequency domain resources occupied by port 0 and port 1 are separated by one subcarrier.
  • the two adjacent occupied REs correspond to an OCC codeword sequence of length 2.
  • port 0 and port 1 use a set of OCC codeword sequences of length 2 (+1+1 and +1-1).
  • port 2 and port 3 are located in the same RE and are mapped to the unoccupied REs of port 0 and port 1 in a comb-tooth manner in the frequency domain.
  • port 2 and port 3 use a set of OCC codeword sequences of length 2 (+1+1 and +1-1).
  • CDM group 0 includes port 0, port 1, port 4 and port 5
  • CDM group 1 includes port 2, port 3, port 6 and port 7.
  • CDM group 0 and CDM group 1 are frequency division multiplexing, and the reference signals corresponding to the DMRS ports contained in the CDM group are distinguished by OCC.
  • port 0, port 1, port 4 and port 5 are located in the same RE, and resource mapping is performed in the frequency domain in a comb-tooth manner, that is, the adjacent frequency domain resources occupied by port 0, port 1, port 4 and port 5 are separated by one subcarrier.
  • the two adjacent subcarriers and two OFDM symbols occupied correspond to an OCC codeword sequence of length 4.
  • OCC codeword sequence For example, for subcarrier 0 and subcarrier 2 corresponding to OFDM symbol 1 and OFDM symbol 2, port 0, port 1, port 4 and port 5 use a set of OCC codes with a length of 4 (+1+1+1+1/+1+1-1-1/+1-1+1-1/+1-1-1+1).
  • port 2, port 3, port 6 and port 7 are located in the same RE and are mapped in a comb-tooth manner on the unoccupied subcarriers of port 0, port 1, port 4 and port 5 in the frequency domain.
  • port 2, port 3, port 6 and port 7 use a set of OCC codes with a length of 4 (+1+1+1+1/+1+1-1-1/+1-1+1-1/+1-1-1+1).
  • the time-frequency resource mapping of single-symbol DMRS and dual-symbol DMRS is shown in the third and fourth figures from the left of Figure 2.
  • a maximum of 6 ports are supported.
  • the 6 DMRS ports are divided into 3 code division multiplexing groups, and frequency division multiplexing is used between CDM groups.
  • the reference signals corresponding to the DMRS ports contained in the CDM are orthogonalized by OCC.
  • CDM group 0 contains port 0 and port 1; CDM group 1 contains port 2 and port 3; CDM group 2 contains port 4 and port 5.
  • Frequency division multiplexing is used between CDM groups (mapped on different frequency domain resources).
  • the reference signals corresponding to the DMRS ports contained in the CMD group are mapped on the same time-frequency resources.
  • the reference signals corresponding to the DMRS ports contained in the CMD group are distinguished by OCC.
  • For a DMRS port its corresponding DMRS reference signal is mapped in the frequency domain to multiple resource subblocks containing 2 consecutive subcarriers, and the adjacent resource subblocks are separated by 4 subcarriers in the frequency domain.
  • port 0 and port 1 are located in the same RE, and resource mapping is performed in a comb-tooth manner. Taking the frequency domain resource granularity of 1 resource block (RB) as an example, port 0 and port 1 occupy subcarrier 0, subcarrier 1, subcarrier 6 and subcarrier 7.
  • Port 2 and port 3 occupy subcarrier 2, subcarrier 3, subcarrier 8 and subcarrier 9.
  • Port 4 and port 5 occupy subcarrier 4, subcarrier 5, subcarrier 10 and subcarrier 11.
  • the corresponding OCC codeword sequence of length 2 (+1+1 and +1-1) is in the adjacent 2 subcarriers.
  • a maximum of 12 ports are supported.
  • the 12 DMRS ports are divided into 3 CDM groups, and frequency division multiplexing is used between CDM groups.
  • the reference signals corresponding to the DMRS ports contained in the CDM are guaranteed to be orthogonal through OCC.
  • CDM group 0 contains port 0, port 1, port 6 and port 7;
  • CDM group 1 contains port 2, port 3, port 8 and port 9;
  • CDM group 2 contains port 4, port 5, port 10 and port 11.
  • Frequency division multiplexing is used between CDM groups (mapped on different frequency domain resources).
  • the reference signals corresponding to the DMRS ports contained in the CMD group are mapped on the same time-frequency resources.
  • the reference signals corresponding to the DMRS ports contained in the CMD group are distinguished by OCC.
  • a DMRS port its corresponding DMRS reference signal is mapped in the frequency domain to multiple resource subblocks containing 2 consecutive subcarriers, and the adjacent resource subblocks are separated by 4 subcarriers in the frequency domain.
  • the ports included in a CDM group are located in the same RE, and resources are mapped in a comb-tooth manner in the frequency domain. Taking the frequency domain resource granularity of 1RB as an example, port 0, port 1, port 6 and port 7 occupy subcarrier 0, subcarrier 1, subcarrier 6 and subcarrier 7 corresponding to OFDM symbol 1 and OFDM symbol 2.
  • Port 2 port 3, port 8 and port 9 occupy subcarrier 2, subcarrier 3, subcarrier 8 and subcarrier 9 corresponding to OFDM symbol 1 and OFDM symbol 2.
  • Port 4, port 5, port 10 and port 11 occupy subcarrier 4, subcarrier 5, subcarrier 10 and subcarrier 11 corresponding to OFDM symbol 1 and OFDM symbol 2.
  • the two adjacent subcarriers corresponding to the two OFDM symbols correspond to an OCC codeword sequence of length 4 (+1+1+1+1/+1+1-1-1/+1-1+1-1/+1-1-1+1).
  • the number of transmitting and receiving antennas will further increase (the number of transmitting antennas of network equipment supports 128 transmitting antennas (transmission antenna, T) or 256T, and the number of receiving antennas of the terminal is 8 receiving antennas (receiving antenna, R)), and the channel information acquisition will be more accurate, which can further support a higher number of transmission streams to improve the spectrum efficiency of the MIMO system.
  • the above aspects will inevitably require more DMRS ports to support a higher number of transmission streams (greater than 12 streams). As the number of transmission streams increases, the accuracy of channel estimation is required to be higher. However, the current maximum of 12 orthogonal ports cannot guarantee good performance for transmissions greater than 12 streams.
  • the simplest way to expand the number of existing orthogonal DMRS ports is to increase the time-frequency resources occupied by DMRS. This method can ensure that the number of DMRS symbols corresponding to each DMRS port remains unchanged, but the exponential increase in DMRS overhead will also reduce the spectrum efficiency of the system exponentially.
  • Another method is to reuse more DMRS resources corresponding to more orthogonal DMRS ports while ensuring the same time-frequency resources (overhead).
  • one of the effective technical solutions is to introduce new DMRS ports through code division multiplexing enhancement (increasing the number of DMRS sequences in the same time-frequency resources) on the basis of the existing NR DMRS ports.
  • Code division multiplexing is an effective method to introduce more orthogonal DMRS ports within the same time-frequency resources.
  • a possible code division multiplexing implementation method is as follows.
  • single-symbol Type 2 DMRS is taken as an example.
  • frequency division duplex-orthogonal cover code (FD-OCC) expansion can also be performed in the following manner. The corresponding pattern of this expansion method is shown in Figure 3.
  • the left figure shows the DMRS port configuration of the existing NR protocol.
  • the upper left table in the figure shows the subcarrier numbers (identifier, ID) occupied by DMRS (subcarriers No. 0-11) and the corresponding port indexes
  • the lower left figure takes ports P0 and P1 as examples to illustrate the corresponding DMRS mask design method.
  • the frequency domain subcarrier numbers occupied in a resource block are ⁇ 0, 1, 6, 7 ⁇
  • the mask sequence corresponding to the P0 port is ⁇ +1, +1, +1, +1 ⁇
  • the mask sequence corresponding to the P1 port is ⁇ +1, -1, +1, -1 ⁇ .
  • the P1 port occupies the same time-frequency resources as the P0 port, and is transmitted on the same time-frequency resources as the P0 port through code division orthogonality.
  • the mask sequence here refers to the corresponding frequency domain mask sequence in Table 1.
  • the upper table on the right and the lower figure on the right give a new FD-OCC expansion scheme for DMRS.
  • the DMRS ports P0, P1, P6, and P7 belonging to the same CDM group 0 in the figure as an example.
  • the DMRS ports in this scheme multiplex a group of ports (2 ports: P6 and P7) through code division multiplexing in the same time-frequency resources compared to the DMRS ports in the above-mentioned existing scheme, and the corresponding mask sequences on the subcarrier numbers ⁇ 0, 1, 6, 7 ⁇ are ⁇ +1, +1, -1, -1 ⁇ and ⁇ +1, -1, -1, +1 ⁇ .
  • the multiplexing method of the remaining CDM groups is the same as that of CDM group 0. Through this technical means, the total number of DMRS ports multiplexed in the same time-frequency resources can be doubled.
  • This expansion method can be naturally extended to single/double symbol, Type 1/2 DMRS configuration types through the same sequence and mapping method.
  • the DMRS port and time-frequency resource mapping corresponding to the above expansion method are shown in Table 3-6.
  • a sequence used in the capacity expansion method is an interference randomization sequence:
  • the time-frequency resource position for sending the PTRS signal at the PTRS port can be determined according to the associated DMRS port.
  • the base sequence corresponding to the PTRS signal is the same as that of the DMRS signal, that is, it only includes r(2n+k′) corresponding to the DMRS signal generation formula (that is, the above formula 5), and does not include the time-frequency masks w f (k′) and w t (l′).
  • time-frequency resource mapping of the PTRS port is as follows:
  • l is the time domain position corresponding to the PTRS signal
  • k is the frequency domain position corresponding to the PTRS signal
  • p is the port number
  • ⁇ is the subcarrier spacing
  • ⁇ PT-RS,i is the power coefficient
  • rk is the base sequence.
  • the value of the time domain position l corresponding to the PTRS signal is related to parameters such as the time domain density (time density) L PT-RS , which is not described in detail in this application.
  • the value formula of the frequency domain position k corresponding to the PTRS signal is as follows:
  • i 0, 1, 2... (RB offset index where PTRS exists).
  • the candidate DMRS ports that can be associated with the PTRS ports specified in the current NR protocol are shown in Table 7 above.
  • the candidate DMRS ports are 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003;
  • the candidate DMRS ports are 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005.
  • any of the following subcarrier offsets can be configured through high-layer signaling: offset00, offset01, offset10, offset11.
  • the frequency domain starting subcarrier of the PTRS port and the associated DMRS port in the sending RB is the same (the subcarrier offset is 0); if other subcarrier offset values are configured, such as offset01, the frequency domain starting subcarrier of the PTRS port and the associated DMRS port in the sending RB is offset by 2 subcarriers; and so on.
  • any subcarrier offset among offset01, offset10, and offset11 can be configured by the resource element offset (resourceElementOffset) field in the high-level parameter "Phase Tracking Reference Signal-Downlink Configuration (PTRS-DownlinkConfig)". If there is no resourceElementOffset field in the high-level parameter PTRS-DownlinkConfig, the default subcarrier offset is "offset00".
  • n RNTI is the value of the radio network temporary identity (RNTI) corresponding to the DMRS port scheduled by the current DCI.
  • N RB is the number of RBs scheduled at that time.
  • K PT-RS ⁇ 2,4 ⁇ is the PTRS frequency density, with the unit being RB.
  • the NR protocol defines its value range as shown in Table 8 below:
  • l MCS is the MCS scheduled at that time
  • ptrs-MCS1 ⁇ 4 is the MCS threshold range configured by the high layer
  • L PT-RS is the density of the aforementioned PTRS in the time domain, which means the symbol interval of PTRS in a time slot. The value of 1 means that PTRS is sent in each time domain OFDM symbol.
  • the NR protocol defines its value range as shown in Table 9 below:
  • N RB is the number of RBs scheduled at the time
  • N RB0 ⁇ 1 is the RB threshold range configured by the high layer
  • K PT-RS is the density of the aforementioned PTRS in the frequency domain, which means the RB interval at which PTRS appears in a scheduling bandwidth. The value is 2, which means that PTRS is sent once on every two frequency domain RBs.
  • Table 10 shows the relationship between the PTRS port and the DMRS port.
  • the NR standard also defines the indication method of the association as follows:
  • the Phase Tracking Reference Signal-Demodulation Reference Signal Association (PTRS-DMRS association) field in the DCI can be used to indicate the association relationship between PTRS and DMRS. There are two possibilities for this indication: 0 or 2 bits.
  • the selection table for the maximum number of PTRS ports configured according to the PTRS-DMRS association field is as follows:
  • Table 11 corresponds to the configuration of PTRS port number 1 (i.e., PTRS port 0), and indicates one of the maximum four candidate DMRS ports (i.e., the scheduled DMRS ports) through the PTRS-DMRS association field, determines the index of the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0, and determines the PTRS sequence and time-frequency resource mapping method based on the DMRS port index and the aforementioned PTRS time-frequency resource mapping rules.
  • Table 12 corresponds to the configuration of the PTRS port number being 2 (ie, PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1):
  • the most significant bit (MSB) of the PTRS-DMRS association field is used to indicate the DMRS port sharing PTRS port 0; the least significant bit (LSB) of the PTRS-DMRS association field is used to indicate the DMRS port sharing PTRS port 1.
  • the MSB of the PTRS-DMRS association field may also be used to indicate a DMRS port that shares PTRS port 1; the LSB of the PTRS-DMRS association field may also be used to indicate a DMRS port that shares PTRS port 0.
  • This application additionally introduces the concept of an antenna coherence group to further illustrate the association between the PTRS port and the DMRS port.
  • the configuration scenario with a PTRS port number of 2 generally appears in the partially coherent and non-coherent uplink precoding matrix transmission (UL Codebook based transmission) mode; correspondingly, the above-mentioned PTRS port number of 1 configuration generally appears in the full-coherent uplink precoding matrix transmission mode.
  • Full coherence means that all antenna ports can send the same stream of data
  • Partial coherence means that some antenna ports can send the same stream of data
  • Non-coherent means that each antenna port can only send one stream of data.
  • the transmission precoding matrix index (TPMI) set corresponds to the uplink 4-stream (i.e., 4-stream 4-transmission) transmission of the terminal's 4 transmitting antennas.
  • a row of the precoding matrix corresponds to a PUSCH antenna port/sounding reference signal (SRS) port
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • One column of the code matrix corresponds to an uplink transmission stream (which can also be understood as a DMRS port).
  • the actual number of PTRS ports sent depends on the uplink TPMI form and the maximum number of streams:
  • PUSCH port 0 and PUSCH port 2 share PTRS port 0, and PUSCH port 1 and PUSCH port 3 share PTRS port 1 (it can be understood that this determines the mapping of PUSCH port to PTRS port, and on which PUSCH port PTRS is sent); at the same time, PTRS port 0 is associated with the uplink 'x'th stream, and PTRS port 1 is associated with the uplink 'y'th stream, and x and y are determined according to the above Table 12 (indicated by DCI).
  • a single terminal supports a maximum of 4 PUSCH/SRS ports and a maximum of 4 uplink streams.
  • a maximum of 8 PUSCH/SRS ports and/or a maximum of 8 uplink streams how to determine the association between the PTRS port and the DMRS port, the current protocol has no corresponding solution.
  • the present application provides a communication solution, which indicates the association relationship between at least one PTRS port and at least one DMRS port through DCI, and predefines the association relationship between at least one PTRS port and at least one PUSCH/SRS port, so that the association relationship between the PTRS port and the DMRS port and the PUSCH/SRS port respectively can be accurately determined, thereby improving the reliability of communication.
  • FIG. 4 it is a flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method may include the following steps:
  • the network device sends radio resource control (RRC) signaling.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the terminal receives the RRC signaling.
  • the uplink PTRS signal may be configured by a phase tracking reference signal-uplink configuration (PTRS-UplinkConfig) information element in the RRC signaling.
  • PTRS-UplinkConfig phase tracking reference signal-uplink configuration
  • the RRC signaling can be used to configure the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports.
  • the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports can be configured through the high-level parameter maxNrofPorts in the PTRS-UplinkConfig information element.
  • the network device may configure the number of Ng through RRC signaling, or the terminal may also report the number of Ng.
  • the number of Ng is 1, 2 or 4.
  • the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports can be configured by the network device through high-level signaling (for example, RRC signaling).
  • the network device can send a first message, and the first message is used to configure a maximum number of Q uplink PTRS ports, Q ⁇ M.
  • the first information is a high-level signaling such as RRC.
  • the network device configures "n1”; when the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports is 2, the network device configures “n1", “n2” or “n2”; when the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports is 4, the network device configures "n1", “n2", “n4" or "n4".
  • the terminal may also report the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports supported. For example, the terminal reports the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports supported. M is a positive integer.
  • the terminal reports the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports supported.
  • the terminal reports "n1"; when the maximum number of PTRS ports is 2, the terminal reports “n1", “n2” or “n2”; when the maximum number of PTRS ports is 4, the terminal reports "n1", “n2", “n4" or "n4".
  • the RRC signaling can also be used to configure the current PTRS port of the terminal.
  • the RRC signaling can also be used to configure the subcarrier offset between the PTRS port and the DMRS port associated therewith.
  • the subcarrier offset can be any one of offset00, offset01, offset10, and offset11 in Table 7 above.
  • any one of the subcarrier offsets of offset01, offset10, and offset11 can be configured by the resource element offset (resourceElementOffset) field in the high-level parameter "Phase Tracking Reference Signal-Downlink Configuration (PTRS-DownlinkConfig)". If there is no resourceElementOffset field in the high-level parameter PTRS-DownlinkConfig, the default subcarrier offset is "offset00".
  • the RRC signaling can also be used to configure one or more RB threshold ranges. As shown in Table 8, the RRC signaling configures the following RB threshold ranges: N RB0 ⁇ 1 .
  • the RRC field can be frequencyDensity, and the value can be two values in the integer ⁇ 1...276 ⁇ : SEQUENCE(SIZE(2))OF INTEGER(1...276) OPTIONAL,--Need S
  • the RRC signaling can also be used to configure one or more MCS threshold ranges. As shown in Table 9, the RRC signaling configures the following MCS threshold ranges: ptrs-MCS1 ⁇ 4.
  • the RRC field may be timeDensity.
  • the value can be any of the following three integers: SEQUENCE(SIZE(3))OF INTEGER(1...29) OPTIONAL,--Need S
  • each PTRS port in at least one PTRS port corresponds to one or more Ng groups.
  • Each Ng in one or more Ng groups corresponds to one or more PUSCH ports, or each Ng in one or more Ng groups corresponds to one or more SRS ports.
  • the correspondence between Ng and SRS ports is similar to the correspondence between Ng and PUSCH ports. This embodiment is described by taking the correspondence between Ng and PUSCH ports as an example.
  • the network device may send at least one of the following information to the terminal: the rank of the uplink PUSCH, TPMI.
  • the terminal may determine the above-mentioned precoding matrix based on the rank and TPMI of the uplink PUSCH, thereby determining at least one PTRS port.
  • the precoding matrix includes X PUSCH ports and Y data layers, each data layer corresponds to a DMRS port, X is greater than 4; or, X is greater than 4 and Y is greater than 4.
  • the X PUSCH ports are reported by the terminal or configured by the network device, and the X PUSCH ports are associated with the above-mentioned M PTRS ports according to predefined rules.
  • the PUSCH transmission may correspond to two codewords, where it is assumed that the data layer indexes of the maximum 8 layers are 0 to 7, and the mapping rules from codewords to data layers are shown in the following table:
  • one codeword corresponds to multiple data layers, where each data layer corresponds to one codeword.
  • each data layer corresponds to a DMRS port.
  • one codeword corresponds to multiple DMRS ports, and each DMRS port corresponds to one codeword. That is, the "first DMRS port is the DMRS port corresponding to the first codeword" in right 1 can be understood as, through the above TPMI and the mapping of codewords to data layers, the terminal device can determine the DMRS port corresponding to each codeword, and can determine the first DMRS port corresponding to the first codeword. Similarly, the terminal can determine the second DMRS port corresponding to the second codeword.
  • PTRS port 0 the maximum number of PTRS ports supported by the terminal/configured by the network device is 1, and the network device can configure 1 PTRS port (PTRS port 0) for the terminal through high-level signaling. Then, according to predefined rules, PTRS port 0 can be associated with PUSCH ports 0-7.
  • the network device configures or predefines Ng0 to correspond to PUSCH ports 0-3, and Ng1 to correspond to PUSCH ports 4-7.
  • the description of the correspondence between Ng and PUSCH ports in this embodiment is only an example and is not limited.
  • the maximum number of PTRS ports supported by the terminal/configured by the network device is 2.
  • the network device can configure 1 PTRS port (PTRS port 0) for the terminal.
  • PTRS port 0 can be associated with PUSCH ports 0-7, and PTRS port 0 corresponds to 2 Ngs; the network device can also configure 2 PTRS ports (PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1) for the terminal, and as shown in Figure 5a, PUSCH ports 0-3 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 4-7 correspond to another Ng.
  • PTRS port 0 can be associated with PUSCH ports 0-3, PTRS port 1 can be associated with PUSCH ports 4-7, and 1 PTRS port corresponds to 1 Ng.
  • the network device may also configure or predefine Ng0 to correspond to PUSCH ports 0, 2, 4, and 6, and Ng1 to correspond to PUSCH ports 1, 3, 5, and 7.
  • the description of the correspondence between Ng and PUSCH ports in this embodiment is only an example and is not intended to be limiting.
  • Terminal Support/Network The maximum number of PTRS ports configured for the device is 2.
  • the network device can configure 1 PTRS port (PTRS port 0) for the terminal.
  • PTRS port 0 can be associated with PUSCH ports 0-7, and PTRS port 0 corresponds to 2 Ngs; the network device can also configure 2 PTRS ports (PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1) for the terminal, and as shown in Figure 5b, PUSCH ports 0, 2, 4, 6 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 1, 3, 5, 7 correspond to another Ng.
  • PTRS port 0 can be associated with PUSCH ports 0, 2, 4, 6, PTRS port 1 can be associated with PUSCH ports 1, 3, 5, 7, and 1 PTRS port corresponds to 1 Ng.
  • the maximum number of PTRS ports supported by the terminal/configured by the network device is 4, and the network device can configure 1, 2, 3 or 4 PTRS ports for the terminal.
  • the network device configures 1, 2 or 3 PTRS ports for the terminal, 1 PTRS port can correspond to multiple Ngs.
  • Ng 4, where PUSCH port 0-1 belongs to Ng0, PUSCH port 2-3 belongs to Ng1, PUSCH port 4-5 belongs to Ng2, and PUSCH port 6-7 belongs to Ng4.
  • the network device configures 4 PTRS ports for the terminal, 1 PTRS port corresponds to 1 Ng.
  • PTRS port p0 corresponds to PUSCH port 0-1
  • PTRS port p1 corresponds to PUSCH port 2-3
  • PTRS port p2 corresponds to PUSCH port 4-5
  • PTRS port p3 corresponds to PUSCH port 6-7.
  • the network device configures 4 PTRS ports for the terminal, and 1 PTRS port corresponds to 1 Ng.
  • PTRS port p0 corresponds to PUSCH ports 0 and 4
  • PTRS port p1 corresponds to PUSCH ports 1 and 5
  • PTRS port p2 corresponds to PUSCH ports 2 and 6
  • PTRS port p3 corresponds to PUSCH ports 3 and 7.
  • the network device configures 2 PTRS ports for the terminal, and 1 PTRS port corresponds to 2 Ngs.
  • PTRS port p0 corresponds to PUSCH ports 0, 2, 4, 6, and PTRS port p1 corresponds to PUSCH ports 1, 3, 5, 7.
  • the network device configures 2 PTRS ports for the terminal, and 1 PTRS port corresponds to 2 Ngs.
  • PTRS port p0 corresponds to PUSCH port 0-3, and PTRS port p1 corresponds to PUSCH port 4-6.
  • one PTRS port can correspond to one or more Ngs, where each Ng corresponds to multiple PUSCH ports.
  • one PTRS port corresponds to two Ngs, and one Ng corresponds to one PUSCH port; for partially coherent transmission, one PTRS port corresponds to one Ng, and one Ng corresponds to two PUSCH ports; for fully coherent transmission, one PTRS port corresponds to one Ng, and one Ng corresponds to four PUSCH ports.
  • PTRS port 0 corresponds to PUSCH ports 0, 1, 4, and 5
  • PTRS port 1 corresponds to PUSCH ports 2, 3, 6, and 7.
  • PTRS port 0 can be associated with the DMRS port corresponding to the data layer transmitted by PUSCH ports 0, 1, 4, and 5, and PTRS port 1 can be associated with the DMRS port corresponding to the data layer transmitted by PUSCH ports 2, 3, 6, and 7; further, the data layer transmitted by PUSCH ports 0, 1, 4, and 5 can correspond to codeword 0, and the data layer transmitted by PUSCH ports 2, 3, 6, and 7 can correspond to codeword 1, then PTRS port 0 can correspond to codeword 0, and PTRS port can correspond to codeword 1. That is, in the corresponding rights 4 and 5, the first codeword corresponds to the first PTRS port, and the second codeword corresponds to the second PTRS port.
  • the data layer transmitted by the above PUSCH ports 0, 1, 4, and 5 corresponds to codeword 0, and the data layer transmitted by PUSCH ports 2, 3, 6, and 7 corresponds to codeword 1, then PTRS port 0 corresponds to codeword 0, and PTRS port can take codeword 1 as an example.
  • X takes a value of 0, corresponding to PUSCH port indexes 0 to 7, respectively, and Y takes a maximum value of 8, corresponding to 8 PUSCH transmission data layers.
  • the maximum number of layers that can be transmitted by PUSCH ports 0, 1, 4, and 5 can be L 1
  • the maximum number of layers that can be transmitted by PUSCH ports 2, 3, 6, and 7 can be L 2
  • the maximum values of L 1 and L 2 are both 4
  • since each PUSCH data layer corresponds to a DMRS port that is, the maximum DMRS port value corresponding to PUSCH ports 0, 1, 4, and 5 is L 1
  • the maximum DMRS port value corresponding to PUSCH ports 2, 3, 6, and 7 is L 2
  • the maximum DMRS port value corresponding to PTRS port 0 is L 1
  • the maximum DMRS port value corresponding to PTRS port 1 is L 2 ; that is, the first DMRS port shared by the first PTRS port in weight 10 is L 1
  • the second DMRS port value shared by the second PTRS port is L 2 .
  • association relationship between the PTRS port and the PUSCH port and the association relationship between the PTRS port and the codeword, the specific port number and the codeword index are only examples and are not limited.
  • the above describes the association relationship between the PTRS port and the PUSCH port.
  • the association relationship between the PTRS port and the PUSCH port can be determined according to a predefined rule.
  • the following describes the association relationship between the PTRS port and the DMRS port:
  • the network device sends a DCI.
  • the terminal receives the DCI.
  • This embodiment can be applicable to scenarios where the uplink number is greater than 4 PUSCH/SRS ports, for example, 5 to 8 PUSCH/SRS ports; or applicable to scenarios where the uplink number is greater than 4 PUSCH/SRS ports and greater than 4 streams, for example, any combination of 5 to 8 PUSCH/SRS ports and 5 to 8 streams.
  • the precoding matrix is:
  • the above precoding matrix is used as an example for description.
  • the precoding matrix is:
  • the current number of PTRS ports configured by the network device for the terminal is different, and the association relationship between the PTRS port and the DMRS port is different:
  • association relationship between the PTRS port and the DMRS port can be designed as follows:
  • the network device sends a DCI to the terminal, where the DCI is used to indicate the association between at least one PTRS port and at least one DMRS port.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI is used to indicate the association between the PTRS port and the DMRS port.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI can be 3 bits, which is used to indicate any one of 8 values.
  • the MSB of the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI is used to indicate the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0; the LSB of the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI is used to indicate the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1.
  • the LSB of the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI is used to indicate the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0; the MSB of the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI is used to indicate the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1.
  • the network device configures two PTRS ports (PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1) for the terminal, and as shown in Figure 5a, PUSCH ports 0-3 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 4-7 correspond to another Ng.
  • PTRS port 0 can be associated with PUSCH ports 0-3, PTRS port 1 can be associated with PUSCH ports 4-7, and 1 PTRS port corresponds to 1 Ng.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI includes MSB and LSB. Among them, MSB is used to indicate the association relationship between PTRS port 0 and DMRS port, and LSB is used to indicate the association relationship between PTRS port 1 and DMRS port. MSB and LSB are 2 bits respectively.
  • the first MSB of the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI is used to indicate the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0; the first LSB of the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI is used to indicate the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1; the second MSB of the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI is used to indicate the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 2; and the second LSB of the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI is used to indicate the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 3.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI includes 2 MSBs and 2 LSBs.
  • the first MSB is used to indicate the association relationship between PTRS port 0 and DMRS port
  • the first LSB is used to indicate the association relationship between PTRS port 1 and DMRS port
  • the second MSB is used to indicate the association relationship between PTRS port 2 and DMRS port
  • the second LSB is used to indicate the association relationship between PTRS port 3 and DMRS port.
  • Each MSB and each LSB is 1 bit.
  • the terminal determines, from the at least one DMRS port according to the DCI, a DMRS port respectively associated with the at least one PTRS port.
  • the terminal selects the corresponding association relationship between the PTRS port and the DMRS port according to the current number of PTRS ports configured by the network device for the terminal and different Ng, and determines the DMRS port associated with at least one PTRS port from the association relationship according to the indication of the DCI.
  • the terminal can determine the DMRS port associated with the current PTRS port according to Table 14 and the DCI.
  • the DMRS ports scheduled after expansion are ⁇ 0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11 ⁇ . Assuming that the DCI indicates "01", the current number of PTRS ports configured by the network device for the terminal is PTRS port 0, then the DMRS port associated with PTRS0 is the second scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1001.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11 ⁇
  • the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0,1,2,3 ⁇ .
  • the terminal After the terminal receives the DCI, assuming that the MSB in the DCI is "10", the terminal determines that the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0 is the third scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1002; the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 1 are ⁇ 8,9,10,11 ⁇ , assuming that the LSB in the DCI is "01", the terminal determines that the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is the second scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1009.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11 ⁇ , and the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0,1 ⁇ .
  • the terminal determines that the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0 is the second scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1001; the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 1 are ⁇ 2,3 ⁇ .
  • the terminal determines that the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is ⁇ 2,3 ⁇ .
  • the DMRS port with the same degree is the first scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1002; the scheduled DMRS port of shared PTRS port 2 is ⁇ 8,9 ⁇ , assuming that the second MSB in the DCI is "1", the terminal determines that the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 2 is the second scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1009; the scheduled DMRS port of shared PTRS port 3 is ⁇ 10,11 ⁇ , assuming that the second LSB in the DCI is "0", the terminal determines that the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 3 is the first scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1010.
  • the terminal may also determine the time-frequency resource position and the PTRS signal sequence of the PTRS signal according to at least one of the determined DMRS port index, the currently scheduled MCS, and the currently scheduled RB number.
  • the network device can configure the MCS of the terminal for the current scheduling, and the terminal can determine the time domain density of the PTRS signal according to the MCS of the current scheduling and the above Table 8. Further, according to the time domain density of the PTRS signal and the value formula of the time domain position l corresponding to the PTRS signal, the time domain position l corresponding to the PTRS signal is determined.
  • the network device can configure the number of RBs scheduled by the terminal at this time, and the terminal can determine the frequency domain density of the PTRS signal according to the number of RBs scheduled at this time and the above Table 9. Further, according to the frequency domain density of the PTRS signal and the value formula of the frequency domain position k corresponding to the PTRS signal (Formula 7), the frequency domain position k corresponding to the PTRS signal is determined.
  • the terminal further determines the time-frequency resource position of the PTRS signal according to the time domain position l and the frequency domain position k corresponding to the PTRS signal and according to Formula 6.
  • the base sequence corresponding to the PTRS signal is the same as that of the DMRS signal, that is, it only includes the corresponding r(2n+k′) does not include the time-frequency masks w f (k′) and wt (l′).
  • the time-frequency resource and sequence mapping formula of the PTRS signal can follow the above description, but different from the existing protocol, after the DMRS port is expanded, a possible design of the index table of the candidate DMRS port is as follows:
  • the terminal sends at least one PTRS signal through at least one PTRS port according to the DMRS port associated with each of the at least one PTRS ports.
  • the terminal determines the sequence of at least one PTRS signal according to the DMRS ports respectively associated with at least one PTRS port, and after determining the time-frequency resource position of at least one PTRS signal according to Table 7, sends the PTRS signal on the corresponding PTRS port.
  • the above PTRS-DMRS association relationship is used to determine the sequence and time-frequency resources of the PTRS signal, and the specific sending behavior is still sent according to the sequence and time-frequency resources corresponding to the PTRS port, and has nothing to do with the DMRS port.
  • the association relationship between at least one PTRS port and at least one DMRS port is indicated by DCI, and the association relationship between at least one PTRS port and at least one PUSCH/SRS port is predefined, so that the association relationship between the PTRS port and the DMRS port and the PUSCH/SRS port respectively can be accurately determined, thereby improving the reliability of communication.
  • the above embodiments describe the association relationship between the PTRS port and the DMRS port and the PUSCH/SRS port.
  • a second codeword may be introduced.
  • how to determine the association relationship between the PTRS port and the DMRS port to improve the reliability of communication the following embodiments will describe the solution.
  • the network device sends RRC signaling.
  • the terminal receives the RRC signaling.
  • the RRC signaling is used to configure at least one of the following information: the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports, the current PTRS port of the terminal, the subcarrier offset between the PTRS port and the DMRS port, the MCS threshold range, the RB threshold range, the number of PUSCH ports, and the number of antenna coherence.
  • the specific configuration method can refer to step S401 in the above embodiment.
  • the network device sends codeword indication information.
  • the terminal receives the codeword indication information.
  • the network device may send a DCI to the terminal, where the DCI includes at least one of the following information: a rank of an uplink PUSCH and a TPMI.
  • the terminal may determine the number of codewords according to the rank of the uplink PUSCH. For example, if the rank of the uplink PUSCH is less than or equal to 4, it is determined that 1 codeword is required; if the rank of the uplink PUSCH is greater than 4 and less than or equal to 8, it is determined that 2 codewords are required.
  • TPMI corresponds to a precoding matrix, which includes X PUSCH ports and Y data layers, each data layer corresponds to a DMRS port, X is greater than 4; or, X is greater than 4 and Y is greater than 4.
  • the X PUSCH ports are reported by the terminal or configured by the network device, and the X PUSCH ports are associated with the M PTRS ports according to predefined rules. For example, if the network device is configured with 8 PUSCH/SRS ports and the number of transmission layers indicated by the DCI is 5 streams, then the TPMI is used to indicate a precoding matrix with 8 rows and 5 columns.
  • the terminal can determine the precoding matrix according to the rank and TPMI of the uplink PUSCH, thereby determining at least one PTRS port.
  • the association between the PTRS port and the PUSCH port can refer to the description of the above embodiment.
  • This embodiment is applicable to the scenario where the number of uplink PUSCH/SRS ports is greater than 4 and the number of uplink streams is greater than 4.
  • a second codeword may be introduced.
  • this embodiment considers using one or more layers of DMRS ports of one of the codewords (the first codeword) as candidate DMRS ports for the associated PTRS port.
  • the network device sends codeword indication information to the terminal.
  • the codeword indication information is used to indicate a first codeword, and the codeword indication information includes an MCS corresponding to the first codeword.
  • the codeword indication information may also include at least one of the following information: a new data indicator (NDI) and a redundancy version (RV).
  • the network device may also send multiple groups of codeword indication information to the terminal, each group of codeword indication information including the MCS corresponding to each codeword.
  • the terminal may select the codeword corresponding to the largest MCS among the multiple codewords as the first codeword. If the MCS is the largest, the quality of the PTRS signal sent by the DMRS port corresponding to one or more layers of the codeword is the best.
  • the terminal determines the precoding matrix according to the rank and TPMI of the uplink PUSCH as shown in Figure 5a, where the rows correspond to PUSCH ports 0-7 in sequence, and the columns correspond to the uplink transmission layer number/DMRS port 0-7 in sequence.
  • the precoding matrix includes 2 Ngs (Ng0 and Ng1) and 2 codewords (CW0 and CW1).
  • the network device is configured with 2 PTRS ports (PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1).
  • the number Ng is 2, and the terminal can report that the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports supported by the terminal is 1 or 2.
  • the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports M supported by the terminal can be reported by the terminal as 2.
  • the network device can also configure the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports to be 2.
  • PUSCH ports 0-3 share PTRS port 0, and PUSCH ports 4-7 share PTRS port 1.
  • the phase noise corresponding to PUSCH ports 0-3 is measured through PTRS port 0, and the phase noise corresponding to PUSCH ports 4-7 is measured through PTRS port 1.
  • the association relationship of PTRS-DMRS can be obtained according to the association method of the example of this embodiment.
  • the MCS corresponding to CW0 is greater than the MCS corresponding to CW1, that is, the first codeword is CW0.
  • the first codeword CW0 includes the 0th to 3rd columns of the precoding matrix shown in FIG9a
  • the second codeword CW1 includes the 4th to 7th columns of the precoding matrix shown in FIG9a.
  • the association relationship between the PTRS port 0 and the four scheduled DMRS ports is pre-configured by the network device or pre-stored by the terminal as shown in the following table:
  • This value is the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field can be 2 bits and is used to indicate which scheduled DMRS port is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the second case is that the first codeword CW0 includes the 0th to 2nd columns and the 7th column of the precoding matrix shown in FIG. 9b, and the second codeword CW1 includes the 3rd to 6th columns of the precoding matrix shown in FIG. 9b.
  • the two codewords each correspond to two PTRS ports, that is, the first codeword CW0 corresponds to PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1, and the second codeword CW1 corresponds to PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1.
  • the PUSCH ports 0-2 sent by the 3rd layer of the first codeword CW0 correspond to the PTRS port 0, and the PUSCH port 7 sent by the 4th layer of the first codeword CW0 corresponds to the PTRS port 1; the PUSCH port 3 sent by the 1st layer of the second codeword CW1 corresponds to the PTRS port 0, and the PUSCH ports 4-6 sent by the 2nd to 4th layers of the second codeword CW1 correspond to the PTRS port 1.
  • the PTRS port 1 for the PTRS port 1 corresponding to the PUSCH port 7 sent by the 4th layer of the first codeword CW0, the PTRS port 1 is associated with the preset DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1011.
  • the network device pre-configures or the terminal pre-stores the association relationship between the PTRS port 0 and the 3 scheduled DMRS ports as shown in the following table:
  • This value is the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field can be 2 bits and is used to indicate which scheduled DMRS port is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the third case is that the first codeword CW0 includes the 0th to 1st columns and the 6th to 7th columns of the precoding matrix shown in FIG. 9c, and the second codeword CW1 includes the 2nd to 5th columns of the precoding matrix shown in FIG. 9c.
  • the two codewords each correspond to two PTRS ports, that is, the first codeword CW0 corresponds to PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1, and the second codeword CW1 corresponds to PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1.
  • the PUSCH ports 0-1 sent by the 1st and 2nd layers of the first codeword CW0 correspond to PTRS port 0, and the PUSCH ports 6 and 7 sent by the 3rd and 4th layers of the first codeword CW0 correspond to PTRS port 1; the PUSCH ports 2-3 sent by the 1st and 2nd layers of the second codeword CW1 correspond to PTRS port 0, and the PUSCH ports 4-6 sent by the 3rd and 4th layers of the second codeword CW1 correspond to PTRS port 1.
  • the network device pre-configures or the terminal pre-stores the association relationship between the PTRS port 0 and the two scheduled DMRS ports, and the association relationship between the PTRS port 1 and the two scheduled DMRS ports as shown in the following table:
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI includes the MSB and LSB.
  • the MSB is used to indicate the association between PTRS port 0 and DMRS port
  • the LSB is used to indicate the association between PTRS port 1 and DMRS port.
  • the MSB and LSB are 1 bit each.
  • the terminal determines the precoding matrix according to the rank and TPMI of the uplink PUSCH as shown in FIG10, where the rows are sequentially The columns correspond to PUSCH ports 0-7 and the columns correspond to uplink transmission layer numbers/DMRS ports 0-5. Based on the precoding matrix, it can be determined that the precoding matrix includes 2 Ngs (Ng0 and Ng1) and 2 codewords (CW0 and CW1).
  • the network device is configured with 2 PTRS ports (PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1).
  • the number Ng is 2, and the terminal can report that the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports supported by the terminal is 1 or 2.
  • the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports M supported by the terminal can be reported by the terminal as 2.
  • the network device can also configure the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports to be 2.
  • PUSCH ports 0-3 share PTRS port 0, and PUSCH ports 4-7 share PTRS port 1. It can be understood here that, physically speaking, the phase noise corresponding to PUSCH ports 0-3 is measured through PTRS port 0, and the phase noise corresponding to PUSCH ports 4-7 is measured through PTRS port 1.
  • the MCS corresponding to CW0 is greater than the MCS corresponding to CW1, that is, the first codeword is CW0.
  • the first codeword CW0 includes columns 0-2 of the precoding matrix shown in Figure 10, and the second codeword CW1 includes columns 3-5 of the precoding matrix shown in Figure 10.
  • each codeword corresponds to a PTRS port, that is, the first codeword CW0 corresponds to PTRS port 0, and the second codeword CW1 corresponds to PTRS port 1.
  • the PUSCH ports 0-3 sent by the 3 layers of the first codeword CW0 correspond to PTRS port
  • the PUSCH ports 4-7 sent by the 3 layers of the second codeword CW1 correspond to PTRS port 1.
  • the network device pre-configures or the terminal pre-stores the association relationship between PTRS port 0 and the three scheduled DMRS ports as shown in the following table:
  • This value is the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field can be 2 bits and is used to indicate which scheduled DMRS port is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the terminal determines the precoding matrix according to the rank and TPMI of the uplink PUSCH as shown in Figure 11, where the rows correspond to PUSCH ports 0-7 in sequence, and the columns correspond to the uplink transmission layer number/DMRS port 0-3 in sequence. Based on the precoding matrix, it can be determined that the precoding matrix includes 2 Ngs (Ng0 and Ng1) and 1 codeword (CW0).
  • the network device is configured with 2 PTRS ports (PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1).
  • the number Ng is 2, and the terminal can report that the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports supported by the terminal is 1 or 2.
  • the network device can configure the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports to be 1 or 2.
  • the terminal can report that the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports supported by the terminal is 2 for description.
  • PUSCH ports 0-3 share PTRS port 0, and PUSCH ports 4-7 share PTRS port 1. It can be understood here that, physically speaking, the phase noise corresponding to PUSCH ports 0-3 is measured through PTRS port 0, and the phase noise corresponding to PUSCH ports 4-7 is measured through PTRS port 1.
  • the first codeword CW0 includes columns 0-3 of the precoding matrix shown in Figure 11. According to the association between the PTRS port and the PUSCH port, CW0 corresponds to two PTRS ports, that is, the first codeword CW0 corresponds to PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1. Then the PUSCH ports 0-3 sent by the 2 layers of the first codeword CW0 correspond to PTRS port 0, and the PUSCH ports 4-7 sent by the other 2 layers of the first codeword CW0 correspond to PTRS port 1.
  • the network device pre-configures or the terminal pre-stores the association relationship between PTRS port 0, PTRS port 1 and the two scheduled DMRS ports as shown in the following table:
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI includes the MSB and LSB.
  • the MSB is used to indicate the association between PTRS port 0 and DMRS.
  • the association relationship between ports, LSB is used to indicate the association relationship between PTRS port 1 and DMRS port.
  • MSB and LSB are 1 bit respectively.
  • the terminal determines the precoding matrix according to the rank and TPMI of the uplink PUSCH as shown in Figure 6a, where the rows correspond to PUSCH ports 0-7 in sequence, and the columns correspond to the uplink transmission layer number/DMRS port 0-7 in sequence.
  • the precoding matrix includes 4 Ng (Ng0 ⁇ Ng3) and 2 codewords (CW0 and CW1).
  • the network device is configured with 4 PTRS ports (PTRS port 0 ⁇ PTRS port 3).
  • the number Ng is 4, and the terminal can report that the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports supported by the terminal is 1, 2, 3 or 4.
  • the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports M supported by the terminal can be reported by the terminal as 4.
  • the network device can also configure the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports to be 4.
  • PUSCH ports 0-1 share PTRS port 0, PUSCH ports 2-3 share PTRS port 1, PUSCH ports 4-5 share PTRS port 2, and PUSCH ports 6-7 share PTRS port 3. It can be understood here that, physically, the phase noise corresponding to PUSCH ports 0-1 is measured through PTRS port 0, the phase noise corresponding to PUSCH ports 2-3 is measured through PTRS port 1, the phase noise corresponding to PUSCH ports 4-5 is measured through PTRS port 2, and the phase noise corresponding to PUSCH ports 6-7 is measured through PTRS port 3.
  • the MCS corresponding to CW0 is greater than the MCS corresponding to CW1, that is, the first codeword is CW0.
  • the first codeword CW0 includes columns 0-2 and 7 of the precoding matrix shown in FIG12a
  • the second codeword CW1 includes columns 3-6 of the precoding matrix shown in FIG12a.
  • each codeword corresponds to three PTRS ports, that is, the first codeword CW0 corresponds to PTRS port 0, PTRS port 1 and PTRS port 3; the second codeword CW1 corresponds to PTRS port 1 to PTRS port 3.
  • the PUSCH port 0-1 sent by the 2nd layer of the first codeword CW0 corresponds to the PTRS port 0, the PUSCH port 2 sent by the 1st layer of the first codeword CW0 corresponds to the PTRS port 1, and the PUSCH port 7 sent by the 1st layer of the first codeword CW0 corresponds to the PTRS port 3; the PUSCH port 3 sent by the 1st layer of the second codeword CW1 corresponds to the PTRS port 1, the PUSCH ports 4-5 sent by the 2nd layer of the second codeword CW1 correspond to the PTRS port 2, and the PUSCH port 6 sent by the 1st layer of the second codeword CW1 corresponds to the PTRS port 3.
  • the network device pre-configures or the terminal pre-stores the association relationship between the PTRS port 0 and the two scheduled DMRS ports corresponding to the second layer of the first codeword CW0 as shown in the following table:
  • This value is the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field can be 1 bit, which is used to indicate which scheduled DMRS port is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 1 is the preset port.
  • the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 1 is the preset port.
  • the second case is that the first codeword CW0 includes the 0th to 3rd columns of the precoding matrix shown in FIG12b, and the second codeword CW1 includes the 4th to 7th columns of the precoding matrix shown in FIG12b.
  • each codeword corresponds to two PTRS ports, that is, the first codeword CW0 corresponds to PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1; the second codeword CW1 corresponds to PTRS port 2 and PTRS port 3.
  • the PUSCH ports 0-1 transmitted by the 2nd layer of the first codeword CW0 correspond to PTRS port 0, and the PUSCH ports 2-3 transmitted by the 2nd layer of the first codeword CW0 correspond to PTRS port 1; the PUSCH ports 4-5 transmitted by the 2nd layer of the second codeword CW1 correspond to PTRS port 2, and the PUSCH ports 6-7 transmitted by the 2nd layer of the second codeword CW1 correspond to PTRS port 3.
  • the network device pre-configures or the terminal pre-stores the association relationship between PTRS port 0, PTRS port 1 and the two scheduled DMRS ports as shown in the following table:
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI includes the MSB and LSB.
  • the MSB is used to indicate the association between PTRS port 0 and DMRS port
  • the LSB is used to indicate the association between PTRS port 1 and DMRS port.
  • the MSB and LSB are 1 bit each.
  • the network device sends a DCI.
  • the terminal receives the DCI.
  • the DCI is used to indicate an association relationship between at least one first PTRS port and at least one first DMRS port.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11 ⁇ , then the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ in sequence.
  • the DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "01”, the DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "10”, the DMRS port 1002 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "11”, the DMRS port 1003 is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 12, 13 ⁇
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field can be 2 bits, which is used to indicate which scheduled DMRS port is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "01”, the DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "10”, the DMRS port 1002 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "11”, the DMRS port 1003 is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • a DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 may also be determined.
  • the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 may be a predefined or preconfigured DMRS port.
  • the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 can be predefined as the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword CW1. Still taking the above single symbol, Type 1 DMRS, and the DMRS ports scheduled after expansion as ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11 ⁇ as an example, it can be determined that the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is DMRS port 1008.
  • the association relationship between the PTRS port and the DMRS port as shown in Table 17 can be pre-configured, and the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0 can be indicated by the MSB of the PTRS-DMRS association field, and the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 can be indicated by the LSB of the PTRS-DMRS association field.
  • the number of PTRS ports 2 combined with Table 20, for example, for a single symbol, Type 1 DMRS, the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11 ⁇ , then the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0, 1, 2 ⁇ in sequence.
  • the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "00”
  • the DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0
  • the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "01”
  • the DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0
  • the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "10”
  • the DMRS port 1002 is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 12, 13 ⁇
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field can be 2 bits, which is used to indicate which scheduled DMRS port is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "01”, the DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "10”, the DMRS port 1002 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "11”, the DMRS port 1003 is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the PTRS port 1 is associated with a preset DMRS port, that is, the DMRS port 1013 .
  • a DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 may also be determined.
  • the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 may be a predefined or preconfigured DMRS port.
  • the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 can be predefined as the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword CW1. Still taking the above single symbol, Type 1 DMRS, and the DMRS ports scheduled after expansion as ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11 ⁇ as an example, it can be determined that the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is DMRS port 1003.
  • the third case in which the number of PTRS ports 2, combined with Table 21, for example, for a single symbol, Type 1 DMRS, the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11 ⁇ , and the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ .
  • the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0 is the second scheduled DMRS port, That is, DMRS port 1001; the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 1 are ⁇ 10, 11 ⁇ , assuming that the LSB is "0", the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is the first scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1010.
  • the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 0 corresponding to the PUSCH port 2-3 sent by the 1st and 2nd layers of the second codeword CW1 can also be determined.
  • the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 0 can be a predefined or preconfigured DMRS port.
  • the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 0 can be predefined as the DMRS port with the smallest port number corresponding to the 1st and 2nd layers of the second codeword CW1.
  • Type1 DMRS and the DMRS ports scheduled after expansion as ⁇ 0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11 ⁇ as an example, it can be determined that the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 0 is DMRS port 1002.
  • the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 1 may be a predefined or preconfigured DMRS port. For example, it may be predefined that the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 1 may be the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the 3rd and 4th layers of the second codeword CW1.
  • Type1 DMRS and the DMRS ports scheduled after expansion as ⁇ 0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11 ⁇ as an example, it may be determined that the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 1 is DMRS port 1008.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9 ⁇ , then the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0, 1, 2 ⁇ .
  • the DMRS-DMRS association field is "00”
  • the DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0
  • the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "01”
  • the DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0
  • the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "10”
  • the DMRS port 1002 is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field can be 2 bits, which is used to indicate which scheduled DMRS port is associated with PTRS port 0. Assuming that the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "00", the DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "01”, the DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "10", the DMRS port 1002 is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • a DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 may also be determined.
  • the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 may be a predefined or preconfigured DMRS port.
  • the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 can be predefined as the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword CW1. Still taking the above single symbol, Type 1 DMRS, and the DMRS ports scheduled after expansion as ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9 ⁇ as an example, it can be determined that the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is DMRS port 1003.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports are ⁇ 0,1,2,3 ⁇ , and the scheduled DMRS port sharing PTRS port 0 is ⁇ 0,1 ⁇ .
  • the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0 is the second scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1001; the scheduled DMRS port sharing PTRS port 1 is ⁇ 2,3 ⁇ .
  • the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is the first scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1002.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11 ⁇ , then the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in sequence.
  • the DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0; and the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "1", the DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0,1,2,3,4,5,12,13 ⁇ , then the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0,1 ⁇ in sequence.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field can be 1 bit, which is used to indicate which scheduled DMRS port is associated with PTRS port 0. Assuming that the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "0", DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0; and if the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "1", DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 1 is the preset port 1002 .
  • the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 1 is the preset port 1011 .
  • the DMRS ports respectively associated with PTRS port 1 to PTRS port 3 corresponding to the second codeword CW1 may also be determined.
  • the DMRS ports respectively associated with PTRS port 1 to PTRS port 3 corresponding to the second codeword CW1 may be predefined, preconfigured, or obtained according to a default rule.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11 ⁇
  • the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0,1 ⁇ .
  • the MSB is "0”
  • the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0 is the second scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1000
  • the MSB is "1”
  • the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0 is the second scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1001.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 1 are ⁇ 2,3 ⁇ .
  • the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is the first scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1002; assuming the LSB is "1", the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is the first scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1003.
  • the terminal determines, from the at least one first DMRS port according to the DCI, a first DMRS port respectively associated with the at least one first PTRS port.
  • the terminal After receiving the DCI, the terminal obtains the rank and TPMI of the uplink PUSCH in the DCI, and determines the precoding matrix. Based on the determined precoding matrix, the terminal determines the first codeword and at least one first PTRS port corresponding to the first codeword according to the codeword indication information. Then, the terminal determines the first DMRS port associated with the at least one first PTRS port from the at least one DMRS port according to the DCI. For specific examples, refer to the above description.
  • the terminal may also determine the time-frequency resource position and the PTRS signal sequence of the PTRS signal according to at least one of the determined index of the first DMRS port, the MCS scheduled at the time, and the number of RBs scheduled at the time.
  • the network device can configure the MCS of the terminal for the current scheduling, and the terminal can determine the time domain density of the PTRS signal according to the MCS of the current scheduling and the above Table 8. Further, according to the time domain density of the PTRS signal and the value formula of the time domain position l corresponding to the PTRS signal, the time domain position l corresponding to the PTRS signal is determined.
  • the network device can configure the number of RBs scheduled by the terminal at this time, and the terminal can determine the frequency domain density of the PTRS signal according to the number of RBs scheduled at this time and the above Table 9. Further, according to the frequency domain density of the PTRS signal and the value formula of the frequency domain position k corresponding to the PTRS signal (Formula 7), the frequency domain position k corresponding to the PTRS signal is determined.
  • the terminal further determines the time-frequency resource position of the PTRS signal according to the time domain position l and the frequency domain position k corresponding to the PTRS signal and according to Formula 6.
  • the base sequence corresponding to the PTRS signal is the same as that of the DMRS signal, that is, it only includes r(2n+k′) corresponding to the DMRS signal generation formula (ie, the above formula 5), and does not include the time-frequency mask w f (k′) and w t (l′).
  • the codeword indication information may be independent information from the DCI, or the codeword indication information may be located in the first information together with the DCI, and the terminal determines the first DMRS port associated with at least one first PTRS port from at least one first DMRS port according to the first information.
  • the terminal sends at least one PTRS signal through at least one first PTRS port according to the first DMRS port associated with each of the at least one first PTRS ports.
  • the network device receives the at least one PTRS signal.
  • the terminal sends a PTRS signal on a corresponding first PTRS port according to a first DMRS port associated with at least one first PTRS port.
  • the terminal may also send a PTRS signal on a corresponding second PTRS port according to a second DMRS port associated with at least one second PTRS port.
  • the above PTRS-DMRS association relationship is used to determine the sequence and time-frequency resources of the PTRS signal, and the specific sending behavior is still sent according to the sequence and time-frequency resources corresponding to the PTRS port, and has nothing to do with the DMRS port.
  • the association relationship between a PTRS port and a DMRS port can be accurately determined, thereby improving the reliability of communication.
  • the network device sends RRC signaling.
  • the terminal receives the RRC signaling.
  • the RRC signaling is used to configure at least one of the following information: uplink PUSCH transmission mode (including codebook-based transmission mode (Full/Partial/Non-coherent) and non-codebook-based transmission mode), the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports, the current PTRS port of the terminal, the subcarrier offset between the PTRS port and the DMRS port, the MCS threshold range, the RB threshold range, the number of PUSCH ports, and the number of antenna coherence groups.
  • uplink PUSCH transmission mode including codebook-based transmission mode (Full/Partial/Non-coherent) and non-codebook-based transmission mode
  • the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports the current PTRS port of the terminal
  • the subcarrier offset between the PTRS port and the DMRS port the MCS threshold range
  • the RB threshold range the number of PUSCH ports
  • antenna coherence groups can refer to step S401 in the above embodiment.
  • the number of PTRS ports can be as follows:
  • the PUSCH precoding matrix can be expressed in the following form.
  • the TPMI forms corresponding to the three PUSCH transmission modes are introduced.
  • the precoding matrix can be a matrix of Nt ⁇ NL, where Nt is the number of transmit antennas and NL is the number of uplink transmission layers.
  • the following precoding matrix is used as an example to introduce the implementation of a full coherent codebook with 8 antennas and 8 layers.
  • the element in the xth row and yth column of the precoding matrix is represented as a x,y , where a x,y can be a real number with a modulus of 1, and common specific values thereof include ⁇ 1, -1, j, -j ⁇ ; is the power coefficient of the precoding matrix, which can be used to ensure that the power of each PUSCH port and each precoding matrix is the same.
  • a x,y can be a real number with a modulus of 1, and common specific values thereof include ⁇ 1, -1, j, -j ⁇ ; is the power coefficient of the precoding matrix, which can be used to ensure that the power of each PUSCH port and each precoding matrix is the same.
  • the element value in the precoding matrix is generally 1, and other values are not excluded here.
  • the element in the xth row and yth column of the precoding matrix is represented as a x,y , where a x,y can be a real number with a modulus of 1, and common specific values thereof include ⁇ 1, -1, j, -j ⁇ ; is the power coefficient of the precoding matrix, which can be used to ensure that the power of each PUSCH port and each precoding matrix is the same.
  • a x,y can be a real number with a modulus of 1, and common specific values thereof include ⁇ 1, -1, j, -j ⁇ ; is the power coefficient of the precoding matrix, which can be used to ensure that the power of each PUSCH port and each precoding matrix is the same.
  • the partially coherent codebook there is no 0 element in the Nt ⁇ NL precoding matrix.
  • the partially coherent codebook there are elements with a value of 0 in the precoding matrix. In the codewords discussed below, the value of the element in the precoding matrix is generally 1, and other values are not excluded here.
  • the element in the xth row and yth column of the precoding matrix is represented as a x,y , where a x,y can be a real number with a modulus of 1, and common specific values thereof include ⁇ 1, -1, j, -j ⁇ ; is the power coefficient of the precoding matrix, which can be used to ensure that the power of each PUSCH port and each precoding matrix is the same.
  • a x,y can be a real number with a modulus of 1, and common specific values thereof include ⁇ 1, -1, j, -j ⁇ ; is the power coefficient of the precoding matrix, which can be used to ensure that the power of each PUSCH port and each precoding matrix is the same.
  • the codebook is a subset of the above codebook.
  • the terminal determines the precoding matrix according to the rank and TPMI of the uplink PUSCH as shown in Figure 5a, where the rows correspond to PUSCH ports 0-7 in sequence, and the columns correspond to the uplink transmission layer number/DMRS ports 0-7 in sequence.
  • the DMRS ports 0-7 here represent the relative order of the columns of the DMRS ports in the precoding matrix corresponding to the TPMI, that is, corresponding to the 0th to 7th DMRS ports, and do not refer to the specific DMRS port number indicated by the DCI.
  • the precoding matrix includes 2 Ngs (Ng0 and Ng1) and 2 codewords (CW0 and CW1).
  • the network device is configured with 2 PTRS ports (PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1).
  • the number Ng is 2, and the terminal can report that the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports supported by the terminal is 1 or 2.
  • the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports M supported by the terminal can be reported by the terminal as 2.
  • the network device can also configure the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports to be 2.
  • PUSCH ports 0-3 share PTRS port 0, and PUSCH ports 4-7 share PTRS port 1.
  • the phase noise corresponding to PUSCH ports 0-3 is measured through PTRS port 0, and the phase noise corresponding to PUSCH ports 4-7 is measured through PTRS port 1.
  • the association relationship of PTRS-DMRS can be obtained according to the association method of the example of this embodiment.
  • the MCS corresponding to CW0 is greater than the MCS corresponding to CW1, that is, the first codeword is CW0.
  • the first codeword CW0 includes the 0th to 3rd columns of the precoding matrix shown in FIG9a
  • the second codeword CW1 includes the 4th to 7th columns of the precoding matrix shown in FIG9a.
  • the network device sends codeword indication information.
  • the terminal receives the codeword indication information.
  • the network device may send a DCI to the terminal, where the DCI includes codeword indication information.
  • the DCI may also include the rank of the uplink PUSCH.
  • the codeword indication information in the present invention may also be transport block indication information, and the two are equivalent in meaning.
  • the terminal can determine the number of codewords corresponding to the PUSCH transmission according to the codeword indication information contained in the DCI for scheduling uplink data transmission, where the codeword indication information may include at least one of the MCS of the second codeword, the new data indicator (NDI) and the redundancy version (RV); that is, if there is at least one of the above three information corresponding to the second codeword, the terminal device can consider that the PUSCH transmission contains the second codeword.
  • the codeword indication information may include at least one of the MCS of the second codeword, the new data indicator (NDI) and the redundancy version (RV); that is, if there is at least one of the above three information corresponding to the second codeword, the terminal device can consider that the PUSCH transmission contains the second codeword.
  • the terminal may also determine the number of codewords according to the rank of the uplink PUSCH. For example, if the rank of the uplink PUSCH is less than or equal to 4, it is determined that 1 codeword is required; if the rank of the uplink PUSCH is greater than 4 and less than or equal to 8, it is determined that 2 codewords are required.
  • TPMI corresponds to a precoding matrix, which includes X PUSCH ports and Y data layers, each data layer corresponds to a DMRS port, X is greater than 4; or, X is greater than 4 and Y is greater than 4.
  • the X PUSCH ports are reported by the terminal or configured by the network device, and the X PUSCH ports are associated with the M PTRS ports according to predefined rules. For example, if the network device is configured with 8 PUSCH/SRS ports and the number of transmission layers indicated by the DCI is 5 streams, then the TPMI is used to indicate a precoding matrix with 8 rows and 5 columns.
  • the terminal can determine the precoding matrix according to the rank and TPMI of the uplink PUSCH, thereby determining at least one PTRS port.
  • the association between the PTRS port and the PUSCH port can refer to the description of the above embodiment.
  • the network device can configure one PTRS port (PTRS port 0) for the terminal through high-level signaling. According to predefined rules, PTRS port 0 can be associated with PUSCH ports 0-7.
  • the network device configures or predefines Ng0 to correspond to PUSCH ports 0-3, and Ng1 to correspond to PUSCH ports 4-7.
  • the description of the correspondence between Ng and PUSCH ports in this embodiment is only an example and is not limiting.
  • the maximum number of PTRS ports supported by the terminal/configured by the network device is 2.
  • the network device can configure 2 PTRS ports (PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1) for the terminal, and as shown in Figure 5a, PUSCH ports 0-3 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 4-7 correspond to another Ng.
  • PUSCH ports 0-3 can share PTRS port 0, PUSCH ports 4-7 can share PTRS port 0, and 1 Ng shares 1 PTRS port; for the current PUSCH transmission, the network device can also configure 1 PTRS port (PTRS port 0) for the terminal.
  • PTRS port 0 can be associated with PUSCH ports 0-7, and PTRS port 0 corresponds to 2 Ng; or for the current PUSCH transmission, For PUSCH transmission, the network device can also configure any one of the two PTRS ports (PTRS port 0 or PTRS port 1) for the terminal.
  • PUSCH ports 0-3 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 0-3 can share PTRS port 0, or when PTRS port 1 is configured, PUSCH ports 4-7 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 4-7 can share PTRS port 1.
  • the network device may also configure or predefine Ng0 to correspond to PUSCH ports 0, 2, 4, 6, and Ng1 to correspond to PUSCH ports 1, 3, 5, 7.
  • the description of the correspondence between Ng and PUSCH ports in this embodiment is only an example and is not limited.
  • the maximum number of PTRS ports supported by the terminal/configured by the network device is 2.
  • the network device may configure 2 PTRS ports (PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1) for the terminal, and as shown in FIG5b, PUSCH ports 0, 2, 4, 6 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 1, 3, 5, 7 correspond to another Ng.
  • PUSCH ports 0, 2, 4, 6 can share PTRS port 0, PUSCH ports 1, 3, 5, 7 can share PTRS port 1, and 1 Ng shares 1 PTRS port.
  • the network device can also configure one PTRS port (PTRS port 0) for the terminal.
  • PTRS port 0 can be associated with PUSCH ports 0-7, and PTRS port 0 corresponds to 2 Ngs; or for the current PUSCH transmission, the network device can also configure any one of the two PTRS ports (PTRS port 0 or PTRS port 1) for the terminal.
  • PUSCH ports 0, 2, 4, 6 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 0, 2, 4, 6 can share PTRS port 0, or when PTRS port 1 is configured, PUSCH ports 1, 3, 5, 7 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 1, 3, 5, 7 can share PTRS port 1.
  • the maximum number of PTRS ports supported by the terminal/configured by the network device is 4.
  • Ng 4, where PUSCH port 0-1 belongs to Ng0, PUSCH port 2-3 belongs to Ng1, PUSCH port 4-5 belongs to Ng2, and PUSCH port 6-7 belongs to Ng4.
  • the network device configures 4 PTRS ports for the terminal, 1 PTRS port corresponds to 1 Ng. Then, for the current PUSCH transmission, PUSCH port 0-1 shares PTRS port 0, PUSCH port 2-3 shares PTRS port 1, PUSCH port 4-5 shares PTRS port 2, and PUSCH port 6-7 shares PTRS port 3.
  • the network device can also configure one PTRS port (PTRS port 0) for the terminal.
  • PTRS port 0 can be associated with PUSCH ports 0-7, and PTRS port 0 corresponds to 4 Ngs; or for the current PUSCH transmission, the network device can also configure any one of the four PTRS ports (PTRS port 0, 1, 2 or 3) for the terminal.
  • PUSCH ports 0-1 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 0-1 can share PTRS port 0; or when PTRS port 1 is configured, PUSCH ports 2-3 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 2-3 can share PTRS port 1; or when PTRS port 2 is configured, PUSCH ports 4-5 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 4-5 can share PTRS port 2; or when PTRS port 3 is configured, PUSCH ports 6-7 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 6-7 can share PTRS port 3.
  • the network device configures 4 PTRS ports for the terminal, 1 PTRS port corresponds to 1 Ng. Then, for the current PUSCH transmission, PUSCH ports 0 and 4 share PTRS port 0, PUSCH ports 1 and 5 share PTRS port 1, PUSCH ports 2 and 6 share PTRS port 2, and PUSCH ports 3 and 7 share PTRS port 3.
  • the network device can also configure one PTRS port (PTRS port 0) for the terminal.
  • PTRS port 0 can be associated with PUSCH ports 0-7, and PTRS port 0 corresponds to 4 Ngs; or for the current PUSCH transmission, the network device can also configure any one of the four PTRS ports (PTRS port 0, 1, 2 or 3) for the terminal.
  • PUSCH ports 0 and 4 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 0 and 4 can share PTRS port 0; or when PTRS port 1 is configured, PUSCH ports 1 and 5 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 1 and 5 can share PTRS port 1; or when PTRS port 2 is configured, PUSCH ports 2 and 6 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 2 and 6 can share PTRS port 2; or when PTRS port 3 is configured, PUSCH ports 3 and 7 correspond to one Ng, and PUSCH ports 3 and 7 can share PTRS port 3.
  • This embodiment is applicable to the scenario where the number of uplink PUSCH/SRS ports is greater than 4 and/or the number of uplink streams is greater than 4.
  • a second codeword may be introduced.
  • this embodiment considers taking the DMRS port corresponding to each transmission layer in one or more PUSCH transmission layers of one of the codewords (the first codeword) as a candidate DMRS port that can be associated with the PTRS port.
  • the network device sends codeword indication information to the terminal.
  • the codeword indication information is used to indicate a first codeword, and the codeword indication information includes an MCS corresponding to the first codeword.
  • the codeword indication information may also include at least one of the following information: a new data indicator (NDI) and a redundancy version (RV).
  • the network device may also send multiple groups of codeword indication information to the terminal, each group of codeword indication information including the MCS corresponding to each codeword.
  • the terminal may select the codeword corresponding to the largest MCS among the multiple codewords as the first codeword. If the MCS is the largest, the quality of the PTRS signal sent by the DMRS port corresponding to one or more layers of the codeword is the best.
  • the first codeword corresponds to the codeword or the codeword corresponding to the first MCS contained in the indication information, or is called Codeword 0; or
  • the first codeword corresponds to the codeword
  • the codeword corresponding to the second MCS included in the codeword indication information is referred to as Codeword 1; that is, when the MCSs indicated by the two codewords are the same, a default codeword is preset as the first codeword (referred to as preset rule 1);
  • the first codeword is determined according to the TPMI corresponding to the current PUSCH transmission.
  • the specific determination method is as follows: (1) Receive DCI, obtain the indication information of TPMI in the DCI, and determine the number of PTRS ports contained in each CW through the TPMI and codeword information of the current PUSCH transmission.
  • the codeword information here mainly refers to the predefined codeword to layer mapping information (codeword to layer mapping), or the codeword to layer mapping information notified at the time (2) Determine the codeword containing a larger number of PTRS ports as the first codeword (called preset rule 2). For preset rule 2, two examples are given below to illustrate:
  • antenna coherence group Ng0 transmits 3 layers of PUSCH (i.e., columns 0, 1, and 4), where, for the 3 layers transmitted by Ng0, CW0 contains 2 layers and CW1 contains 1 layer; antenna coherence group Ng1 transmits 2 layers of PUSCH (i.e., columns 2 and 3), corresponding to 2 layers of CW1.
  • PTRS port 0 is bound to the uplink antenna port (PUSCH Antenna port) ⁇ 0,1,2,3 ⁇ (i.e., rows 0-3) in a predefined manner, which corresponds to the uplink antenna port contained in Ng0; it is assumed that PTRS port 1 is bound to the uplink antenna port ⁇ 4,5,6,7 ⁇ (i.e., rows 4-7) in a predefined manner, which corresponds to the uplink antenna port contained in Ng1. It can be seen from the TPMI and CW to layer mapping relationship that:
  • the PTRS port included in the layer corresponding to CW0 (column 0,1 of TPMI) (included here can be further interpreted as a candidate DMRS port) is PTRS port 0; CW0 corresponds to the first and second DMRS ports.
  • the first and second DMRS ports can be used as candidate DMRS ports for PTRS port 0.
  • the PTRS ports included in the layer corresponding to CW1 are PTRS ports 0 and 1, among which the DMRS ports corresponding to the 2nd and 3rd layers can be used as candidate DMRS ports for PTRS port 1, and the DMRS ports corresponding to the 4th layer can be used as candidate DMRS ports for PTRS port 0.
  • CW1 corresponds to the 3rd, 4th, and 5th DMRS ports.
  • the 3rd and 4th DMRS ports can be used as candidate DMRS ports for PTRS port 1
  • the 5th DMRS port can be used as a candidate DMRS port for PTRS port 0.
  • CW0 and CW1 if the first codeword is CW0, then what is solved is the candidate DMRS port association indication of PTRS port 0; if the first codeword is CW1, then it can indicate both the candidate DMRS port association indication of PTRS port 0 and the candidate DMRS port association indication of PTRS port 1.
  • antenna coherence group Ng0 transmits 2 layers of PUSCH (i.e., columns 0 and 4), where, for the 2 layers transmitted by Ng0, CW0 contains 1 layer and CW1 contains 1 layer; antenna coherence group Ng1 transmits 1 layer of PUSCH (i.e., column 1), corresponding to 1 layer of CW0; antenna coherence group Ng2 transmits 1 layer of PUSCH (i.e., column 2), corresponding to 1 layer of CW1; antenna coherence group Ng3 transmits 1 layer of PUSCH (i.e., column 3), corresponding to 1 layer of CW1.
  • PTRS port 0 is bound to uplink antenna ports ⁇ 0,1,2,3 ⁇ (i.e., rows 0-3) in a predefined manner, corresponding to the uplink antenna ports included in Ng0 and Ng1; it is assumed that PTRS port 1 is bound to uplink antenna ports ⁇ 4,5,6,7 ⁇ (i.e., rows 4-7) in a predefined manner, corresponding to the uplink antenna ports included in Ng2 and Ng3.
  • the mapping relationship between TPMI and CW to layers shows that:
  • the PTRS port included in the layer corresponding to CW0 (column 0,1 of TPMI) (included here can be further interpreted as a candidate DMRS port) is PTRS port 0; CW0 corresponds to the first and second DMRS ports.
  • the first and second DMRS ports can be used as candidate DMRS ports for PTRS port 0.
  • the PTRS ports included in the layer corresponding to CW1 are PTRS ports 0 and 1, among which the DMRS ports corresponding to the 2nd and 3rd layers can be used as candidate DMRS ports for PTRS port 1, and the DMRS ports corresponding to the 4th layer can be used as candidate DMRS ports for PTRS port 0.
  • CW1 corresponds to the 3rd, 4th, and 5th DMRS ports.
  • the 3rd and 4th DMRS ports can be used as candidate DMRS ports for PTRS port 1
  • the 5th DMRS port can be used as a candidate DMRS port for PTRS port 0.
  • CW0 and CW1 if the first codeword is CW0, then what is solved is the candidate DMRS port association indication of PTRS port 0; if the first codeword is CW1, then it can indicate both the candidate DMRS port association indication of PTRS port 0 and the candidate DMRS port association indication of PTRS port 1.
  • antenna coherence group Ng0 transmits 2 layers of PUSCH (i.e., columns 0 and 4), where for the 2 layers transmitted by Ng0, CW0 contains 1 layer, and CW1 contains 1 layer; antenna coherence group Ng1 transmits 1 layer of PUSCH (i.e., the first column), corresponding to 1 layer of CW0; antenna coherence group Ng2 transmits 1 layer of PUSCH (i.e., the second column), corresponding to 1 layer of CW1; antenna coherence group Ng3 transmits 1 layer of PUSCH (i.e., the third column), corresponding to 1 layer of CW1.
  • PTRS port 0 is bound to the uplink antenna port ⁇ 0,1 ⁇ (i.e., row 0-1) in a predefined manner, which corresponds to the uplink antenna port included in Ng0; it is assumed that PTRS port 1 is bound to the uplink antenna port ⁇ 2,3 ⁇ (i.e., row 2-3) in a predefined manner, which corresponds to the uplink antenna port included in Ng1; it is assumed that PTRS port 2 is bound to the uplink antenna port ⁇ 4,5 ⁇ (i.e., row 4-5) in a predefined manner, which corresponds to the uplink antenna port included in Ng2; it is assumed that PTRS port 3 is bound to the uplink antenna port ⁇ 6,7 ⁇ (i.e., row 6-7) in a predefined manner, which corresponds to the uplink antenna port included in Ng3. It can be seen from the TPMI and CW to layer mapping relationship that:
  • the layer corresponding to CW0 includes (here, including can be further interpreted as, as candidate DMRS ports) PTRS ports 0 and PTRS port 1; CW0 corresponds to the first and second DMRS ports.
  • the first and second DMRS ports can be used as candidate DMRS ports for PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1.
  • the PTRS ports included in the layer corresponding to CW1 are PTRS ports 0, 2, and 3, among which the DMRS port corresponding to the 2nd layer can be used as a candidate DMRS port for PTRS port 2, the DMRS port corresponding to the 3rd layer can be used as a candidate DMRS port for PTRS port 3, and the DMRS port corresponding to the 4th layer can be used as a candidate DMRS port for PTRS port 0.
  • CW1 corresponds to the 3rd, 4th, and 5th DMRS ports.
  • the 3rd DMRS port can be used as a candidate DMRS port for PTRS port 2
  • the 4th DMRS port can be used as a candidate DMRS port for PTRS port 3
  • the 5th DMRS port can be used as a candidate DMRS port for PTRS port 0.
  • the first codeword if the first codeword is CW0, it solves the candidate DMRS port association indication of PTRS ports 0 and 1; if the first codeword is CW1, it can solve both the candidate DMRS port association indication of PTRS port 0 and the candidate DMRS port association indication of PTRS ports 2 and 3.
  • the terminal determines the precoding matrix as shown in Figure 5a based on the transmission layer and TPMI of the uplink PUSCH, wherein the rows correspond to PUSCH ports 0-7 in sequence, and the columns correspond to the number of uplink transmission layers/DMRS ports 0-7 in sequence.
  • the precoding matrix includes 2 Ngs (Ng0 and Ng1) and 2 codewords (CW0 and CW1).
  • the network device is configured with 2 PTRS ports (PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1).
  • the precoding matrix shown in Figure 5a is an exemplary description, and the codeword form of Partial-coherent can be as shown in step (2) of S1301, corresponding to the TPMI form introduced in step S1301, and the PTRS-DMRS association relationship indication method described in this embodiment can all be supported.
  • the scenario with a PTRS port number of 2 can also use the process corresponding to the embodiment to indicate the PTRS-DMRS port association relationship.
  • the number Ng is 2, and the terminal can report that the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports supported by the terminal is 1 or 2.
  • the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports M supported by the terminal can be reported by the terminal as 2.
  • the network device can also configure the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports to be 2.
  • PUSCH ports 0-3 share PTRS port 0, and PUSCH ports 4-7 share PTRS port 1.
  • the phase noise corresponding to PUSCH ports 0-3 is measured through PTRS port 0, and the phase noise corresponding to PUSCH ports 4-7 is measured through PTRS port 1.
  • the association relationship of PTRS-DMRS can be obtained according to the association method of the example of this embodiment.
  • the first codeword CW0 includes the 0th to 3rd columns of the precoding matrix shown in FIG9a
  • the second codeword CW1 includes the 4th to 7th columns of the precoding matrix shown in FIG9a.
  • the network device pre-configures or the terminal pre-stores the association relationship between the PTRS port 0 and the maximum four scheduled DMRS ports corresponding to the first codeword as shown in Table 26 or Table 27:
  • This value is the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field can be 2 bits and is used to indicate which scheduled DMRS port is associated with the PTRS port contained in the first codeword (the selected codeword).
  • the first codeword CW0 includes columns 0-2 and 7 of the precoding matrix shown in FIG. 9b
  • the second codeword CW1 includes columns 3-6 of the precoding matrix shown in FIG. 9b .
  • the precoding matrix shown in FIG. 9b is an exemplary illustration, and the codeword form of Partial-coherent can be as shown in step (2) of S1301, corresponding to the TPMI form introduced in step S1301, and the PTRS-DMRS association relationship indication method described in this embodiment can all be supported.
  • the scenario where the number of PTRS ports is 2 can also use the process corresponding to the embodiment to indicate the PTRS-DMRS port association relationship.
  • the two codewords each correspond to two PTRS ports, that is, the first codeword CW0 corresponds to PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1, and the second codeword CW1 corresponds to PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1.
  • the PUSCH ports 0-2 sent by the 3rd layer of the first codeword CW0 correspond to PTRS port 0, and the PUSCH port 7 sent by the 4th layer of the first codeword CW0 corresponds to PTRS port 1; the PUSCH port 3 sent by the 1st layer of the second codeword CW1 corresponds to PTRS port 0, and the PUSCH ports 4-6 sent by the 2nd-4th layers of the second codeword CW1 correspond to PTRS port 1.
  • the PTRS port 1 for the PTRS port 1 corresponding to the PUSCH port 7 sent by the 4th layer of the first codeword CW0, the PTRS port 1 is associated with the preset DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1011.
  • the network device pre-configures or the terminal pre-stores the association relationship between the PTRS port 0 and the 3 scheduled DMRS ports as shown in Table 28 or Table 29:
  • Table 29 corresponds to the PTRS-DMRS association of the uplink PTRS port contained in the selected codeword
  • This value is the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field can be 2 bits and is used to indicate which scheduled DMRS port is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the first codeword CW0 includes the 0th to 1st columns and the 6th to 7th columns of the precoding matrix shown in FIG. 9c
  • the second codeword CW1 includes the 2nd to 5th columns of the precoding matrix shown in FIG. 9c.
  • the precoding matrix shown in FIG. 9c is an exemplary description, and the codeword form of Partial-coherent can be as shown in step (2) of S1301, corresponding to the TPMI form introduced in step S1301, and the PTRS-DMRS association relationship indication method described in this embodiment can be supported.
  • the scenario with a PTRS port number of 2 can also use the process corresponding to the embodiment to indicate the PTRS-DMRS port association relationship.
  • the two codewords each correspond to two PTRS ports, that is, the first codeword CW0 corresponds to PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1, and the second codeword CW1 corresponds to PTRS port 0 and PTRS port 1.
  • the PUSCH ports 0-1 sent by the 1st and 2nd layers of the first codeword CW0 correspond to PTRS port 0, and the PUSCH ports 6 and 7 sent by the 3rd and 4th layers of the first codeword CW0 correspond to PTRS port 1; the PUSCH ports 2-3 sent by the 1st and 2nd layers of the second codeword CW1 correspond to PTRS port 0, and the PUSCH ports 4-6 sent by the 3rd and 4th layers of the second codeword CW1 correspond to PTRS port 1.
  • the network device pre-configures or the terminal pre-stores the association relationship between the PTRS port 0 and the two scheduled DMRS ports, and the association relationship between the PTRS port 1 and the two scheduled DMRS ports as shown in Table 30 or Table 31:
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI includes the MSB and LSB.
  • the MSB is used to indicate the association between PTRS port 0 and DMRS port
  • the LSB is used to indicate the association between PTRS port 1 and DMRS port.
  • the MSB and LSB are 1 bit each.
  • This embodiment can also be used in the Full-coherent PUSCH transmission mode, as shown in Table 32 to Table 35 below:
  • the terminal determines the precoding matrix according to the transmission layer and TPMI of the uplink PUSCH as shown in the Full coherent transmission mode in part 1) of step S1301, wherein the rows correspond to PUSCH ports 0-7 in sequence, and the columns correspond to the uplink transmission layer number/DMRS port 0-7 in sequence.
  • the precoding matrix includes 1 Ng (Ng0) and 2 codewords (CW0 and CW1).
  • the network device configures 1 PTRS port (PTRS port 0) corresponding to the precoding matrix, and the number of Ng is 1.
  • the terminal can report that the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports supported by the terminal is 1.
  • the maximum number of uplink PTRS ports supported by the terminal that the terminal can report is 1 as an example.
  • This embodiment is applicable to the scenario where the number of uplink PUSCH/SRS ports is greater than 4 and/or the number of uplink streams is greater than 4.
  • a second codeword may be introduced.
  • this embodiment considers taking the DMRS port corresponding to each transmission layer in one or more PUSCH transmission layers of one of the codewords (the first codeword) as a candidate DMRS port that can be associated with the PTRS port.
  • the network device sends codeword indication information to the terminal.
  • the codeword indication information is used to indicate a first codeword, and the codeword indication information includes an MCS corresponding to the first codeword.
  • the codeword indication information may also include at least one of the following information: a new data indicator (NDI) and a redundancy version (RV).
  • the network device may also send multiple sets of codeword indication information to the terminal, each set of codeword indication information including the MCS corresponding to each codeword.
  • the terminal may select the codeword corresponding to the largest MCS among the multiple codewords as the first codeword. If the value of PTRS is the largest, the quality of the DMRS port corresponding to one or more layers based on the codeword sending the PTRS signal is the best.
  • the first codeword corresponds to the codeword or the codeword corresponding to the first MCS contained in the indication information, or is called Codeword 0; or exemplary, when the MCSs indicated by the two codewords are equal, the first codeword corresponds to the codeword corresponding to the second MCS contained in the codeword indication information, or is called Codeword 1; that is, when the MCSs indicated by the two codewords are the same, a default codeword is preset as the first codeword (called preset rule 1);
  • the first codeword is determined according to the TPMI corresponding to the current PUSCH transmission.
  • the specific determination method is as follows: (1) Receive DCI, obtain the indication information of TPMI in the DCI, and determine the number of PTRS ports contained in each CW through the TPMI and codeword information of the current PUSCH transmission.
  • the codeword information here mainly refers to the predefined codeword to layer mapping information (codeword to layer mapping), or the codeword to layer mapping information notified at the time (2) Determine the codeword containing the larger number of PTRS ports as the first codeword (called preset rule 2).
  • the specific PTRS-DMRS association field in the DCI can be as follows: Table 32-Table 35:
  • Table 33 PTRS-DMRS association for uplink PTRS port 0
  • the network device sends PTRS-DMRS association relationship indication information.
  • the terminal receives the PTRS-DMRS association relationship indication information.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association relationship indication information may be included in the DCI.
  • the number of PTRS ports 2 combined with Table 19, for example, for single-symbol, Type 1 DMRS, the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11 ⁇ , then the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ in sequence.
  • the DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "01”, the DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "10”, the DMRS port 1002 is associated with PTRS port 0; the PTRS-DMRS association field is "11”, the DMRS port 1003 is associated with PTRS port 0; the PTRS-DMRS association field is "12”, the DMRS port 1004 is associated with PTRS port 0; the PTRS-DMRS association field is "13", the DMRS port 1005 is associated with PTRS port 0; the PTRS-DMRS association field is "14”, the DMRS port 1006 is associated with PTRS port 0; the PTRS-DMRS association field is "15”, the DMRS port 1007 is associated with PTRS port 0; the PTRS
  • the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 12, 13 ⁇
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field can be 2 bits, which is used to indicate which scheduled DMRS port is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "01”, the DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "10”, the DMRS port 1002 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "11”, the DMRS port 1003 is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • a DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 may also be determined.
  • the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 may be a predefined or preconfigured DMRS port.
  • the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 can be predefined as the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword CW1. Still taking the above single symbol, Type 1 DMRS, and the DMRS ports scheduled after expansion as ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11 ⁇ as an example, it can be determined that the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is DMRS port 1008.
  • the association relationship between the PTRS port and the DMRS port as shown in Table 17 can be pre-configured, and the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0 can be indicated by the MSB of the PTRS-DMRS association field, and the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 can be indicated by the LSB of the PTRS-DMRS association field.
  • the number of PTRS ports 2 combined with Table 20, for example, for a single symbol, Type 1 DMRS, the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11 ⁇ , then the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0, 1, 2 ⁇ in sequence.
  • the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "00”
  • the DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0
  • the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "01”
  • the DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0
  • the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "10”
  • the DMRS port 1002 is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 12, 13 ⁇
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field can be 2 bits, which is used to indicate which scheduled DMRS port is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "01”, the DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "10”, the DMRS port 1002 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "11”, the DMRS port 1003 is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the PTRS port 1 is associated with a preset DMRS port, that is, the DMRS port 1013 .
  • a DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 may also be determined.
  • the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 may be a predefined or preconfigured DMRS port.
  • the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 can be predefined as the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword CW1. Still taking the above single symbol, Type 1 DMRS, and the DMRS ports scheduled after expansion as ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11 ⁇ as an example, it can be determined that the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is DMRS port 1003.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11 ⁇
  • the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , assuming that the MSB is "1”
  • the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0 is the second scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1001
  • the scheduled DMRS port sharing PTRS port 1 is ⁇ 10, 11 ⁇ , assuming that the LSB is "0”
  • the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is the first scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1010.
  • the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 0 corresponding to the PUSCH port 2-3 sent by the 1st and 2nd layers of the second codeword CW1 can also be determined.
  • the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 0 can be a predefined or preconfigured DMRS port.
  • the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 0 can be predefined as the DMRS port with the smallest port number corresponding to the 1st and 2nd layers of the second codeword CW1.
  • Type1 DMRS and the DMRS ports scheduled after expansion as ⁇ 0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11 ⁇ as an example, it can be determined that the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 0 is DMRS port 1002.
  • the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 1 may be a predefined or preconfigured DMRS port. For example, it may be predefined that the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 1 may be the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the 3rd and 4th layers of the second codeword CW1.
  • Type1 DMRS and the DMRS ports scheduled after expansion as ⁇ 0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11 ⁇ as an example, it may be determined that the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 1 is DMRS port 1008.
  • the DMRS ports scheduled after expansion are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9 ⁇ , then the DMRS ports scheduled for sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0, 1, 2 ⁇ in sequence.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association word If the value of the segment is "00", the DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0; if the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "01", the DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0; if the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "10", the DMRS port 1002 is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field can be 2 bits, which is used to indicate which scheduled DMRS port is associated with PTRS port 0. Assuming that the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "00", the DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "01”, the DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0; the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "10", the DMRS port 1002 is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • a DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 may also be determined.
  • the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 may be a predefined or preconfigured DMRS port.
  • the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 can be predefined as the DMRS port with the smallest port number in the second codeword CW1. Still taking the above single symbol, Type 1 DMRS, and the DMRS ports scheduled after expansion as ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9 ⁇ as an example, it can be determined that the DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is DMRS port 1003.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports are ⁇ 0,1,2,3 ⁇ , and the scheduled DMRS port sharing PTRS port 0 is ⁇ 0,1 ⁇ .
  • the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0 is the second scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1001; the scheduled DMRS port sharing PTRS port 1 is ⁇ 2,3 ⁇ .
  • the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is the first scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1002.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11 ⁇ , then the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in sequence.
  • the DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0; and the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "1", the DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0,1,2,3,4,5,12,13 ⁇ , then the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0,1 ⁇ in sequence.
  • the PTRS-DMRS association field can be 1 bit, which is used to indicate which scheduled DMRS port is associated with PTRS port 0. Assuming that the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "0", the DMRS port 1000 is associated with PTRS port 0; and the value of the PTRS-DMRS association field is "1", the DMRS port 1001 is associated with PTRS port 0.
  • the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 1 is the preset port 1002 .
  • the DMRS port associated with the PTRS port 1 is the preset port 1011 .
  • the DMRS ports respectively associated with PTRS port 1 to PTRS port 3 corresponding to the second codeword CW1 may also be determined.
  • the DMRS ports respectively associated with PTRS port 1 to PTRS port 3 corresponding to the second codeword CW1 may be predefined, preconfigured, or obtained according to a default rule.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports after expansion are ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11 ⁇ , and the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 0 are ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ .
  • the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0 is the second scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1000; assuming that the MSB is "1", the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 0 is the second scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1001.
  • the scheduled DMRS ports sharing PTRS port 1 are ⁇ 2,3 ⁇ .
  • the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is the first scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1002; assuming that the LSB is "1", the scheduled DMRS port associated with PTRS port 1 is the first scheduled DMRS port, that is, DMRS port 1003.
  • the terminal determines, from the at least one first DMRS port according to the DCI, a first DMRS port respectively associated with the at least one first PTRS port.
  • the terminal After receiving the DCI, the terminal obtains the rank and TPMI of the uplink PUSCH in the DCI, and determines the precoding matrix. Based on the determined precoding matrix, the terminal determines the first codeword and at least one first PTRS port corresponding to the first codeword according to the codeword indication information. Then, the terminal determines the first DMRS port associated with at least one first PTRS port from at least one DMRS port according to the DCI. For specific examples, refer to the above description.
  • the terminal may also determine the first DMRS port index, the MCS of the current scheduling, and the number of RBs of the current scheduling. At least one of the following determines the time-frequency resource location and PTRS signal sequence of the PTRS signal.
  • the network device can configure the MCS of the terminal for the current scheduling, and the terminal can determine the time domain density of the PTRS signal according to the MCS of the current scheduling and the above Table 8. Further, according to the time domain density of the PTRS signal and the value formula of the time domain position l corresponding to the PTRS signal, the time domain position l corresponding to the PTRS signal is determined.
  • the network device can configure the number of RBs scheduled by the terminal at this time, and the terminal can determine the frequency domain density of the PTRS signal according to the number of RBs scheduled at this time and the above Table 9. Further, according to the frequency domain density of the PTRS signal and the value formula of the frequency domain position k corresponding to the PTRS signal (Formula 7), the frequency domain position k corresponding to the PTRS signal is determined.
  • the terminal further determines the time-frequency resource position of the PTRS signal according to the time domain position l and the frequency domain position k corresponding to the PTRS signal and according to Formula 6.
  • the base sequence corresponding to the PTRS signal is the same as that of the DMRS signal, that is, it only includes r(2n+k′) corresponding to the DMRS signal generation formula (ie, the above formula 5), and does not include the time-frequency mask w f (k′) and w t (l′).
  • the codeword indication information may be independent information from the DCI, or the codeword indication information may be located in the first information together with the DCI, and the terminal determines the first DMRS port associated with at least one first PTRS port from at least one first DMRS port according to the first information.
  • the terminal sends at least one PTRS signal through at least one first PTRS port according to the first DMRS port associated with each of the at least one first PTRS ports.
  • the network device receives the at least one PTRS signal.
  • the terminal sends a PTRS signal on a corresponding first PTRS port according to a first DMRS port associated with at least one first PTRS port.
  • the terminal may also send a PTRS signal on a corresponding second PTRS port according to a second DMRS port associated with at least one second PTRS port.
  • the above PTRS-DMRS association relationship is used to determine the sequence and time-frequency resources of the PTRS signal, and the specific sending behavior is still sent according to the sequence and time-frequency resources corresponding to the PTRS port, and has nothing to do with the DMRS port.
  • the association relationship between a PTRS port and a DMRS port can be accurately determined, thereby improving the reliability of communication.
  • the terminal and the network device include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function.
  • the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in the form of hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application scenario and design constraints of the technical solution.
  • FIGS 15 to 18 are schematic diagrams of possible communication devices provided in embodiments of the present application. These communication devices can be used to implement the functions of the terminal or network device in the above method embodiments, and thus can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device 1300 includes a transceiver unit 1301 and a processing unit 1302 .
  • the transceiver unit 1301 is used to execute the operations of the terminal in steps S401, S402 and S404 in the embodiment as shown in Figure 4, and the processing unit 1302 is used to execute step S403 in the embodiment as shown in Figure 4.
  • the transceiver unit 1301 is used to execute the operations of the network device in steps S401 , S402 and S404 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the transceiver unit 1301 is used to execute the operations of the terminal in steps S801-S803 and S805 in the embodiment shown in Figure 8
  • the processing unit 1302 is used to execute step S804 in the embodiment shown in Figure 8.
  • the transceiver unit 1301 is used to execute the operations of the network device in steps S801 - S803 and S805 in the embodiment shown in FIG8 .
  • FIG16 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of a terminal.
  • a mobile phone is used as an example of a terminal.
  • the terminal includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input/output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, as well as to control the terminal, execute software programs, process data of software programs, etc.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for conversion between baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing of radio frequency signals.
  • the antenna is mainly used to transmit and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input/output devices such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. By way of example, some types of terminals may not have input/output devices.
  • the processor When sending data, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent and outputs the baseband signal to the RF circuit. After the signal is RF processed, the RF signal is sent out through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, which converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor or integrated with the processor, and the embodiments of the present application do not limit this.
  • the antenna and the radio frequency circuit with transceiver functions can be regarded as the receiving unit and the sending unit of the terminal (also collectively referred to as the transceiver unit), and the processor with the processing function can be regarded as the processing unit of the terminal.
  • the terminal includes a transceiver unit 1401 and a processing unit 1402.
  • the transceiver unit 1401 can also be called a receiver/transmitter (transmitter), a receiver/transmitter, a receiving/transmitting circuit, etc.
  • the processing unit 1402 can also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, etc.
  • the transceiver unit 1401 is used to implement the functions of the transceiver unit 1301 in the embodiment shown in Figure 15; the processing unit 1402 is used to implement the functions of the processing unit 1302 in the embodiment shown in Figure 15.
  • FIG17 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of a network device.
  • the network device includes a radio frequency signal transceiver and conversion part and a part 1502, and the radio frequency signal transceiver and conversion part includes a transceiver unit 1501 part.
  • the radio frequency signal transceiver and conversion part is mainly used for the transceiver of radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals; the part 1502 is mainly used for baseband processing, controlling the network device, etc.
  • the transceiver unit 1501 can also be called a receiver/transmitter (transmitter), a receiver/transmitter, a receiving/transmitting circuit, etc.
  • the part 1502 is usually the control center of the network device, which can usually be called a processing unit, which is used to control the network device to execute the steps executed by the network device in the above-mentioned FIG4 or FIG8.
  • the transceiver unit 1501 can be used to implement the function of the transceiver unit 1301 in the embodiment shown in FIG15, and the part 1502 is used to implement the function of the processing unit 1302 in the embodiment shown in FIG15.
  • Part 1502 may include one or more boards, each of which may include one or more processors and one or more memories, and the processor is used to read and execute programs in the memory to realize baseband processing functions and control of network devices. If there are multiple boards, each board can be interconnected to increase processing capabilities. As an optional implementation, multiple boards may share one or more processors, or multiple boards may share one or more memories, or multiple boards may share one or more processors at the same time.
  • the communication device 1600 includes a processor 1601 and an interface circuit 1602.
  • the processor 1601 and the interface circuit 1602 are coupled to each other.
  • the interface circuit 1602 may be a transceiver or an input/output interface.
  • the communication device 1600 may further include a memory 1603 for storing instructions executed by the processor 1601 or storing input data of the processor 1601 executing instructions or storing data generated after the processor 1601 executes instructions.
  • the processor 1601 is used to implement the function of the processing unit 1302
  • the interface circuit 1602 is used to implement the function of the transceiver unit 1301 .
  • the chip When the above communication device is a chip applied to a terminal, the chip is used to implement the functions of the terminal in the above method embodiment.
  • the chip receives information from other modules in the terminal (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and the information is sent to the terminal by a network device or other device; or the chip sends information to other modules in the terminal (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and the information is sent by the terminal to a network device or other device.
  • the chip When the above communication device is a chip applied to a network device, the chip is used to implement the functions of the network device in the above method embodiment.
  • the chip receives information from other modules in the network device (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and the information is sent to the network device by a terminal or other device; or the chip sends information to other modules in the network device (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and the information is sent to the terminal or other device by the network device.
  • processors in the embodiments of the present application may be a central processing unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP), application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), field programmable gate arrays (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
  • indication of DMRS ports with more than 4 streams is achieved.
  • the method steps in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented by hardware or by a processor executing software instructions.
  • the software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and the software modules can be stored in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory, registers, hard disks, mobile hard disks, compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or any other form of storage medium known in the art.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor so that the processor can read information from the storage medium and write information to the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can also be a component of the processor.
  • the processor and the storage medium can be located in an ASIC.
  • the ASIC can be located in the first node.
  • the processor and the storage medium can also exist in the terminal as discrete components.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, including the above-mentioned communication device.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored.
  • a computer program or instruction is stored.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which, when executed on a computing device, enables the method described in the above embodiment to be executed.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a terminal or other programmable device.
  • the computer program or instruction may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer program or instruction may be transmitted from one website site, computer, server or data center to another website site, computer, server or data center by wired or wireless means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that integrates one or more available media.
  • the available medium may be a magnetic medium, for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a tape; it may also be an optical medium, for example, a digital video disc; it may also be a semiconductor medium, for example, a solid-state hard disk.
  • “at least one” means one or more, and “more than one” means two or more.
  • “And/or” describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist.
  • a and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A and B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the previous and next associated objects are in an “or” relationship; in the formula of this application, the character “/” indicates that the previous and next associated objects are in a "division” relationship.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请公开了一种通信方法、装置及存储介质。本申请中，终端通过接收码字指示信息，该码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，第一码字与至少一个第一PTRS端口对应，并接收DCI，用于指示至少一个第一PTRS端口与至少一个第一DMRS端口之间的关联关系，终端根据码字指示信息和DCI，从至少一个第一DMRS端口中确定与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，并根据与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，通过至少一个第一PTRS端口发送至少一个PTRS信号。采用本申请的方案，可以准确地确定PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，提高了通信的可靠性。

Description

通信方法、装置及存储介质
本申请要求于2022年10月01日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202211215724.9、发明名称为“通信方法、装置及存储介质”的中国专利申请的优先权，以及要求于2023年02月17日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202310165426.1、发明名称为“通信方法、装置及存储介质”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种通信方法、装置及存储介质。
背景技术
相位追踪参考信号(phase tracking reference signal，PTRS)端口与对应的候选解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal，DMRS)端口具有关联关系。目前支持单个终端上行最大4个物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel，PUSCH)端口/探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)端口，和/或支持单个终端上行最大4流传输。然而，在这种场景下，PTRS端口与DMRS端口如何进行关联，目前没有相应的解决方案。
发明内容
本申请提供一种通信方法、装置及存储介质，以准确地确定PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，提高通信的可靠性。
第一方面，提供了一种通信方法，所述方法包括：终端接收码字指示信息，所述码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，所述第一码字与至少一个第一PTRS端口对应；所述终端接收下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)，所述DCI用于指示至少一个第一相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口与所述至少一个第一DMRS端口之间的关联关系，所述至少一个第一DMRS端口为所述第一码字的一层或多层对应的DMRS端口；所述终端根据所述码字指示信息和所述DCI，从所述至少一个第一DMRS端口中确定与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口；以及所述终端根据与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，通过所述至少一个第一PTRS端口发送至少一个PTRS信号。
在该方面中，可以准确地确定PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，提高了通信的可靠性。
示例性地，上述码字指示信息可以与DCI是独立的信息，或者上述码字指示信息也可以与DCI位于第一信息中，终端根据第一信息从至少一个第一DMRS端口中确定与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口。
在一种可能的实现中，所述方法还包括：所述终端上报所述终端支持的M个PTRS端口；或所述终端接收来自网络设备的第一信息，所述第一信息用于配置所述M个PTRS端口，所述M为正整数；以及所述终端确定所述第一码字对应的至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述M。
示例性地，所述终端接收来自网络设备的第二信息，所述第二信息用于配置Q个PTRS端口，所述Q为正整数，所述Q小于或等于所述M。
在另一种可能的实现中，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量为所述M。
在该实现中，根据第一码字包括的层数，第一码字对应的至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量可以为M。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述M>1，至少有一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，其余M-1个PTRS端口关联的DMRS端口是预设端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述M＝2，与两个第一PTRS端口中的一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，与所述两个第一PTRS端口中的另一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是预设端口。
在该实现中，若与一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是从多个候选的第一DMRS端口中确定的，则可以由DCI指示与该第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口；若与另一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口仅为1个，则与该第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是预设端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，与两个第一PTRS端口中的另一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口的数量为1。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述第一码字对应N个第一PTRS端口，所述N<所述M，第二码字对应R 个第二PTRS端口，所述R＝所述M-所述N，所述N、R为正整数；所述终端确定与所述R个第二PTRS端口各自关联的第二DMRS端口，所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中预定义、预配置或根据默认规则得到的DMRS端口。
在该实现中，若第一码字对应的第一PTRS端口小于M，终端可以根据DCI确定与第一PTRS端口对应的第一DMRS端口，第二码字对应R个第二PTRS端口，与R个第二PRS端口各自关联的第二DMRS端口则为预定义、预配置或根据默认规则得到的DMRS端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述N>1，至少有一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，其余N-1个PTRS端口关联的DMRS端口是预设端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述M＝4，所述N＝3，所述R＝1，与三个第一PTRS端口中的一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，与所述三个第一PTRS端口中的另外两个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是预设端口，与所述三个第一PTRS端口中的另外两个第一PTRS端口中的每个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口的数量均为1；或所述M＝4，所述N＝2，所述R＝2，与两个第一PTRS端口中的每个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中端口号最小的DMRS端口，或所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中端口号最大的DMRS端口，或所述第二码字中端口号最小的DMRS端口可以作为所述第一PTRS端口的候选的DMRS端口，或所述第二码字中端口号最大的DMRS端口可以作为所述第一PTRS端口的候选的DMRS端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述码字指示信息包括多个码字中每个码字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，所述第一码字为所述多个码字中最大的MCS对应的码字。
在该实现中，MCS最大，则信道质量较好，确定多个码字中最大的MCS对应的码字对应的至少一个第一PTRS端口，根据与该至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，发送PTRS信号，可以提高PTRS信号的可靠性。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述DCI还包括以下至少一个信息：上行物理上行共享信道PUSCH的秩，TPMI；所述方法还包括：所述终端根据所述上行PUSCH的秩和/或TPMI，确定与所述第一码字对应的至少一个第一PTRS端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述TPMI对应一个预编码矩阵，所述预编码矩阵包括X个PUSCH/SRS端口，以及Y个数据层，每个数据层对应一个DMRS端口，所述X大于4，和/或所述Y大于4。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口是所述终端上报的或网络设备配置的，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口根据预定义规则与所述M个PTRS端口关联。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述第一码字还与至少一个天线相干组对应。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述M大于或等于2，所述第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述天线相干组的数量。
第二方面，提供了一种通信方法，所述方法包括：网络设备发送码字指示信息，所述码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，所述第一码字与至少一个第一相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口对应；所述网络设备发送下行控制信息DCI，所述DCI用于指示至少一个第一相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口与所述至少一个第一DMRS端口之间的关联关系，所述至少一个第一DMRS端口为所述第一码字的一层或多层对应的DMRS端口；以及所述网络设备根据与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，通过所述至少一个第一PTRS端口接收至少一个PTRS信号。
在该方面中，可以准确地确定PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，提高了通信的可靠性。
示例性地，上述码字指示信息可以与DCI是独立的信息，或者上述码字指示信息也可以与DCI位于同一个第一信息中。
在一种可能的实现中，所述方法还包括：所述网络设备接收终端上报的所述终端支持的M个PTRS端口；或所述网络设备发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于配置所述M个PTRS端口；其中，所述M为正整数。
在另一种可能的实现中，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量为所述M。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述M>1，至少有一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，其余M-1个PTRS端口关联的DMRS端口是预设端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述M＝2，与两个第一PTRS端口中的一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，与两个第一PTRS端口中的另一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是 预设端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，与两个第一PTRS端口中的另一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口的数量为1。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述第一码字对应N个第一PTRS端口，所述N<所述M，第二码字对应R个第二PTRS端口，所述R＝所述M-所述N，所述N、R为正整数。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述N>1，至少有一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，其余N-1个PTRS端口关联的DMRS端口是预设端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述M＝4，所述N＝3，所述R＝1，与三个第一PTRS端口中的一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，与所述三个第一PTRS端口中的另外两个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是预设端口，与所述三个第一PTRS端口中的另外两个第一PTRS端口中的每个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口的数量均为1；或所述M＝4，所述N＝2，所述R＝2，与两个第一PTRS端口中的每个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中端口号最小的DMRS端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述码字指示信息包括多个码字中每个码字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，所述第一码字为所述多个码字中最大的MCS对应的码字。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述DCI还包括以下至少一个信息：上行物理上行共享信道PUSCH的秩，TPMI；所述TPMI对应一个预编码矩阵，所述预编码矩阵包括X个PUSCH/SRS端口，以及Y个数据层，每个数据层对应一个DMRS端口，所述X大于4，和/或所述Y大于4。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口是所述终端上报的或网络设备配置的，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口根据预定义规则与所述M个PTRS端口关联。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述第一码字还与至少一个天线相干组对应。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述M大于或等于2，所述第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述天线相干组的数量。
第三方面，提供了一种通信方法，所述方法包括：终端接收下行控制信息DCI，所述DCI用于指示至少一个相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口与至少一个解调参考信号DMRS端口的关联关系，所述至少一个PTRS端口中的每个PTRS端口对应多个天线相干组，所述多个天线相干组中的每个天线相干组对应多个物理上行共享信道PUSCH端口，或所述多个天线相干组中的每个天线相干组对应多个探测参考信号SRS端口；所述终端根据所述DCI从所述至少一个DMRS端口中确定与所述至少一个PTRS端口各自关联的DMRS端口；以及所述终端根据与所述至少一个PTRS端口各自关联的DMRS端口，通过所述至少一个第一PTRS端口发送至少一个PTRS信号。
在该方面中，可以准确地确定PTRS端口分别与DMRS端口、PUSCH/SRS端口之间的关联关系，提高了通信的可靠性。
在一种可能的实现中，所述方法还包括：所述终端上报所述终端支持的M个PTRS端口；或所述终端接收来自网络设备的第一信息，所述第一信息用于配置所述M个PTRS端口，所述M为正整数。
在另一种可能的实现中，所述DCI还包括以下至少一个信息：上行物理上行共享信道PUSCH的秩，TPMI；所述方法还包括：所述终端根据所述上行PUSCH的秩和/或TPMI，确定所述至少一个PTRS端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述TPMI对应一个预编码矩阵，所述预编码矩阵包括X个PUSCH/SRS端口，以及Y个数据层，每个数据层对应一个DMRS端口，所述X大于4，和/或所述Y大于4。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口是所述终端上报的或网络设备配置的，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口根据预定义规则与所述M个PTRS端口关联。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述天线相干组的数量为4，所述PTRS端口的数量为2，其中一个PTRS端口与第一天线相干组、第二天线相干组对应，另一个PTRS端口与第三天线相干组、第四天线相干组对应；4个天线相干组中的每个天线相干组分别对应2个PUSCH端口，或4个天线相干组中的每个天线相干组分别对应2个SRS端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述方法还包括：所述终端接收码字指示信息，所述码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，所述第一码字与所述M个PTRS端口中的至少一个第一PTRS端口对应；所述终端根据所述码字指示信息和所述DCI，从所述至少一个第一DMRS端口中确定与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口；以及所述终端根据与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，发送至少一个PTRS信号。
示例性地，上述码字指示信息可以与DCI是独立的信息，或者上述码字指示信息也可以与DCI位于第一信息中，终端根据第一信息从至少一个第一DMRS端口中确定与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述方法还包括：所述终端确定所述第一码字对应的至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述M。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量为所述M。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述M＝2，与一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，与另一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是预设端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述第一码字对应N个第一PTRS端口，所述N<所述M，第二码字对应R个第二PTRS端口，所述R＝所述M-所述N，所述N、R为正整数；所述终端确定与所述R个第二PTRS端口各自关联的第二DMRS端口，所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中预定义、预配置或根据默认规则得到的DMRS端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中端口号最小的DMRS端口，或所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中端口号最大的DMRS端口，或所述第二码字中端口号最小的DMRS端口可以作为所述第一PTRS端口的候选的DMRS端口，或所述第二码字中端口号最大的DMRS端口可以作为所述第一PTRS端口的候选的DMRS端口。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述码字指示信息包括多个码字中每个码字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，所述第一码字为所述多个码字中最大的MCS对应的码字。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述第一码字还与至少一个天线相干组对应。
第四方面，提供了一种通信方法，所述方法包括：网络设备发送下行控制信息DCI，所述DCI用于指示至少一个相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口与至少一个解调参考信号DMRS端口的关联关系，所述至少一个PTRS端口中的每个PTRS端口对应多个天线相干组，所述多个天线相干组中的每个天线相干组对应多个物理上行共享信道PUSCH端口，或所述多个天线相干组中的每个天线相干组对应多个探测参考信号SRS端口；以及所述网络设备根据与所述至少一个PTRS端口各自关联的DMRS端口，通过所述至少一个第一PTRS端口接收至少一个PTRS信号。
在该方面中，可以准确地确定PTRS端口分别与DMRS端口、PUSCH/SRS端口之间的关联关系，提高了通信的可靠性。
在一种可能的实现中，所述方法还包括：所述网络设备接收终端上报的所述终端支持的M个PTRS端口；或所述网络设备发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于配置所述M个PTRS端口；其中，所述M为正整数。
在另一种可能的实现中，所述DCI还包括以下至少一个信息：上行物理上行共享信道PUSCH的秩，TPMI；所述TPMI对应一个预编码矩阵，所述预编码矩阵包括X个PUSCH/SRS端口，以及Y个数据层，每个数据层对应一个DMRS端口，所述X大于4，和/或所述Y大于4。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口是所述终端上报的或网络设备配置的，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口根据预定义规则与所述M个PTRS端口关联。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述方法还包括：所述网络设备发送码字指示信息，所述码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，所述第一码字与至少一个第一相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口对应；所述DCI用于指示至少一个第一相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口与所述至少一个第一DMRS端口之间的关联关系，所述至少一个第一DMRS端口为所述第一码字的一层或多层对应的DMRS端口；所述网络设备根据与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，接收至少一个PTRS信号。
示例性地，上述码字指示信息可以与DCI是独立的信息，或者上述码字指示信息也可以与DCI位于同一个第一信息中。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量为所述M。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述第一码字对应N个第一PTRS端口，所述N<所述M，第二码字对应R个第二PTRS端口，所述R＝所述M-所述N，所述N、R为正整数。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述码字指示信息包括多个码字中每个码字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，所述第一码字为所述多个码字中最大的MCS对应的码字。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述第一码字还与至少一个天线相干组对应。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述M大于或等于2，所述第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述天线相干 组的数量。
在又一种可能的实现中，所述方法还包括：所述网络设备向所述终端发送码字指示信息，所述码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，所述第一码字与所述M个PTRS端口中的至少一个第一PTRS端口对应；所述网络设备根据与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，接收至少一个PTRS信号。
第五方面，提供了一种通信装置。所述通信装置可以实现上述第一方面中的方法。例如所述通信装置可以是终端或者终端的芯片系统。可以通过软件、硬件、或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现上述方法。
在一种可能的实现中，所述装置包括：收发单元和处理单元；其中：所述收发单元，用于接收码字指示信息，所述码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，所述第一码字与至少一个第一PTRS端口对应；所述收发单元，还用于接收DCI，所述DCI用于指示至少一个第一相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口与所述至少一个第一DMRS端口之间的关联关系，所述至少一个第一DMRS端口为所述第一码字的一层或多层对应的DMRS端口；所述处理单元，用于根据所述码字指示信息和所述DCI，从所述至少一个第一DMRS端口中确定与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口；以及所述收发单元，还用于根据与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，通过所述至少一个第一PTRS端口发送至少一个PTRS信号。
示例性地，上述码字指示信息可以与DCI是独立的信息，或者上述码字指示信息也可以与DCI位于第一信息中，终端根据第一信息从至少一个第一DMRS端口中确定与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口。
可选地，所述收发单元，还用于上报所述终端支持的M个PTRS端口；或所述收发单元，还用于接收来自网络设备的第一信息，所述第一信息用于配置所述M个PTRS端口，所述M为正整数；以及所述处理单元，还用于确定所述第一码字对应的至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述M。
示例性地，所述收发单元，还用于接收来自网络设备的第二信息，所述第二信息用于配置Q个PTRS端口，所述Q为正整数，所述Q小于或等于所述M。
可选地，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量为所述M。
可选地，所述M>1，至少有一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，其余M-1个PTRS端口关联的DMRS端口是预设端口。
可选地，所述M＝2，与两个第一PTRS端口中的一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，与所述两个第一PTRS端口中的另一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是预设端口。
可选地，与两个第一PTRS端口中的另一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口的数量为1。
可选地，所述第一码字对应N个第一PTRS端口，所述N<所述M，第二码字对应R个第二PTRS端口，所述R＝所述M-所述N，所述N、R为正整数；所述处理单元，还用于确定与所述R个第二PTRS端口各自关联的第二DMRS端口，所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中预定义、预配置或根据默认规则得到的DMRS端口。
可选地，所述N>1，至少有一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，其余N-1个PTRS端口关联的DMRS端口是预设端口。
可选地，所述M＝4，所述N＝3，所述R＝1，与三个第一PTRS端口中的一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，与所述三个第一PTRS端口中的另外两个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是预设端口，与所述三个第一PTRS端口中的另外两个第一PTRS端口中的每个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口的数量均为1；或所述M＝4，所述N＝2，所述R＝2，与两个第一PTRS端口中的每个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的。
可选地，所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中端口号最小的DMRS端口，或所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中端口号最大的DMRS端口，或所述第二码字中端口号最小的DMRS端口可以作为所述第一PTRS端口的候选的DMRS端口，或所述第二码字中端口号最大的DMRS端口可以作为所述第一PTRS端口的候选的DMRS端口。
可选地，所述码字指示信息包括多个码字中每个码字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，所述第一码字为所述多个码字中最大的MCS对应的码字。
可选地，所述DCI还包括以下至少一个信息：上行物理上行共享信道PUSCH的秩，TPMI；所述处理单元，还用于根据所述上行PUSCH的秩和/或TPMI，确定与所述第一码字对应的至少一个第一PTRS端口。
可选地，所述TPMI对应一个预编码矩阵，所述预编码矩阵包括X个PUSCH/SRS端口，以及Y个数据层，每个数据层对应一个DMRS端口，所述X大于4，和/或所述Y大于4。
可选地，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口是所述终端上报的或网络设备配置的，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口根据预定义规则与所述M个PTRS端口关联。
可选地，所述第一码字还与至少一个天线相干组对应。
可选地，所述M大于或等于2，所述第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述天线相干组的数量。
第六方面，提供了一种通信装置。所述通信装置可以实现上述第二方面中的方法。例如所述通信装置可以是网络设备或网络设备中的芯片系统。可以通过软件、硬件、或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现上述方法。
在一种可能的实现中，所述装置包括：收发单元，还可以包括处理单元；其中：所述收发单元，用于发送码字指示信息，所述码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，所述第一码字与至少一个第一相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口对应；所述收发单元，还用于发送下行控制信息DCI，所述DCI用于指示至少一个第一相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口与所述至少一个第一DMRS端口之间的关联关系，所述至少一个第一DMRS端口为所述第一码字的一层或多层对应的DMRS端口；以及所述收发单元，还用于根据与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，通过所述至少一个第一PTRS端口接收至少一个PTRS信号。
示例性地，上述码字指示信息可以与DCI是独立的信息，或者上述码字指示信息也可以与DCI位于同一个第一信息中。
可选地，所述收发单元，还用于接收终端上报的所述终端支持的M个PTRS端口；或所述收发单元，还用于发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于配置所述M个PTRS端口；其中，所述M为正整数。
可选地，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量为所述M。
可选地，所述M>1，至少有一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，其余M-1个PTRS端口关联的DMRS端口是预设端口。
可选地，所述M＝2，与两个第一PTRS端口中的一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，与两个第一PTRS端口中的另一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是预设端口。
可选地，与两个第一PTRS端口中的另一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口的数量为1。
可选地，所述第一码字对应N个第一PTRS端口，所述N<所述M，第二码字对应R个第二PTRS端口，所述R＝所述M-所述N，所述N、R为正整数。
可选地，所述N>1，至少有一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，其余N-1个PTRS端口关联的DMRS端口是预设端口。
可选地，所述M＝4，所述N＝3，所述R＝1，与三个第一PTRS端口中的一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，与所述三个第一PTRS端口中的另外两个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是预设端口，与所述三个第一PTRS端口中的另外两个第一PTRS端口中的每个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口的数量均为1；或所述M＝4，所述N＝2，所述R＝2，与两个第一PTRS端口中的每个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的。
可选地，所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中端口号最小的DMRS端口。
可选地，所述码字指示信息包括多个码字中每个码字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，所述第一码字为所述多个码字中最大的MCS对应的码字。
可选地，所述DCI还包括以下至少一个信息：上行物理上行共享信道PUSCH的秩，TPMI；所述TPMI对应一个预编码矩阵，所述预编码矩阵包括X个PUSCH/SRS端口，以及Y个数据层，每个数据层对应一个DMRS端口，所述X大于4，和/或所述Y大于4。
可选地，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口是所述终端上报的或网络设备配置的，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口根据预定义规则与所述M个PTRS端口关联。
可选地，所述第一码字还与至少一个天线相干组对应。
可选地，所述M大于或等于2，所述第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述天线相干组的数量。
第七方面，提供了一种通信装置。所述通信装置可以实现上述第三方面中的方法。例如所述通信装置可以是终端或者终端的芯片系统。可以通过软件、硬件、或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现上述方法。
在一种可能的实现中，所述装置包括：收发单元和处理单元；其中：所述收发单元，用于接收下行控制信息DCI，所述DCI用于指示至少一个相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口与至少一个解调参考信号DMRS端口的关联关系，所述至少一个PTRS端口中的每个PTRS端口对应多个天线相干组，所述多个天线相干 组中的每个天线相干组对应多个物理上行共享信道PUSCH端口，或所述多个天线相干组中的每个天线相干组对应多个探测参考信号SRS端口；所述处理单元，用于根据所述DCI从所述至少一个DMRS端口中确定与所述至少一个PTRS端口各自关联的DMRS端口；以及所述收发单元，还用于根据与所述至少一个PTRS端口各自关联的DMRS端口，通过所述至少一个第一PTRS端口发送至少一个PTRS信号。
可选地，所述收发单元，还用于上报所述终端支持的M个PTRS端口；或所述收发单元，还用于接收来自网络设备的第一信息，所述第一信息用于配置所述M个PTRS端口，所述M为正整数。
可选地，所述DCI还包括以下至少一个信息：上行物理上行共享信道PUSCH的秩，TPMI；所述处理单元，还用于根据所述上行PUSCH的秩和/或TPMI，确定所述至少一个PTRS端口。
可选地，所述TPMI对应一个预编码矩阵，所述预编码矩阵包括X个PUSCH/SRS端口，以及Y个数据层，每个数据层对应一个DMRS端口，所述X大于4，和/或所述Y大于4。
可选地，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口是所述终端上报的或网络设备配置的，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口根据预定义规则与所述M个PTRS端口关联。
可选地，所述天线相干组的数量为4，所述PTRS端口的数量为2，其中一个PTRS端口与第一天线相干组、第二天线相干组对应，另一个PTRS端口与第三天线相干组、第四天线相干组对应；4个天线相干组中的每个天线相干组分别对应2个PUSCH端口，或4个天线相干组中的每个天线相干组分别对应2个SRS端口。
可选地，所述收发单元，还用于接收码字指示信息，所述码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，所述第一码字与所述M个PTRS端口中的至少一个第一PTRS端口对应；所述处理单元，还用于根据所述码字指示信息和所述DCI，从所述至少一个第一DMRS端口中确定与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口；以及所述收发单元，还用于根据与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，发送至少一个PTRS信号。
示例性地，上述码字指示信息可以与DCI是独立的信息，或者上述码字指示信息也可以与DCI位于第一信息中，终端根据第一信息从至少一个第一DMRS端口中确定与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口。
可选地，所述处理单元，还用于确定所述第一码字对应的至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述M。
可选地，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量为所述M。
可选地，所述M＝2，与一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，与另一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是预设端口。
可选地，所述第一码字对应N个第一PTRS端口，所述N<所述M，第二码字对应R个第二PTRS端口，所述R＝所述M-所述N，所述N、R为正整数；所述终端确定与所述R个第二PTRS端口各自关联的第二DMRS端口，所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中预定义、预配置或根据默认规则得到的DMRS端口。
可选地，所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中端口号最小的DMRS端口，或所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中端口号最大的DMRS端口，或所述第二码字中端口号最小的DMRS端口可以作为所述第一PTRS端口的候选的DMRS端口，或所述第二码字中端口号最大的DMRS端口可以作为所述第一PTRS端口的候选的DMRS端口。
可选地，所述码字指示信息包括多个码字中每个码字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，所述第一码字为所述多个码字中最大的MCS对应的码字。
可选地，所述第一码字还与至少一个天线相干组对应。
第八方面，提供了一种通信装置。所述通信装置可以实现上述第四方面中的方法。例如所述通信装置可以是网络设备或网络设备中的芯片系统。可以通过软件、硬件、或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现上述方法。
在一种可能的实现中，所述装置包括：收发单元，还可以包括处理单元；其中：所述收发单元，用于发送下行控制信息DCI，所述DCI用于指示至少一个相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口与至少一个解调参考信号DMRS端口的关联关系，所述至少一个PTRS端口中的每个PTRS端口对应多个天线相干组，所述多个天线相干组中的每个天线相干组对应多个物理上行共享信道PUSCH端口，或所述多个天线相干组中的每个天线相干组对应多个探测参考信号SRS端口；以及所述收发单元，还用于根据与所述至少一个PTRS端口各自关联的DMRS端口，通过所述至少一个第一PTRS端口接收至少一个PTRS信号。
可选地，所述收发单元，还用于接收终端上报的所述终端支持的M个PTRS端口；或所述收发单元，还用于发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于配置所述M个PTRS端口；其中，所述M为正整数。
可选地，所述DCI还包括以下至少一个信息：上行物理上行共享信道PUSCH的秩，TPMI；所述TPMI对应一个预编码矩阵，所述预编码矩阵包括X个PUSCH/SRS端口，以及Y个数据层，每个数据层对应一个DMRS端口，所述X大于4，和/或所述Y大于4。
可选地，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口是所述终端上报的或网络设备配置的，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口根据预定义规则与所述M个PTRS端口关联。
可选地，所述收发单元，还用于发送码字指示信息，所述码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，所述第一码字与至少一个第一相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口对应；所述DCI用于指示至少一个第一相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口与所述至少一个第一DMRS端口之间的关联关系，所述至少一个第一DMRS端口为所述第一码字的一层或多层对应的DMRS端口；所述收发单元，还用于根据与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，接收至少一个PTRS信号。
示例性地，上述码字指示信息可以与DCI是独立的信息，或者上述码字指示信息也可以与DCI位于同一个第一信息中。
可选地，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量为所述M。
可选地，所述第一码字对应N个第一PTRS端口，所述N<所述M，第二码字对应R个第二PTRS端口，所述R＝所述M-所述N，所述N、R为正整数。
可选地，所述码字指示信息包括多个码字中每个码字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，所述第一码字为所述多个码字中最大的MCS对应的码字。
可选地，所述第一码字还与至少一个天线相干组对应。
可选地，所述M大于或等于2，所述第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述天线相干组的数量。
可选地，所述收发单元，还用于向所述终端发送码字指示信息，所述码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，所述第一码字与所述M个PTRS端口中的至少一个第一PTRS端口对应；所述收发单元，还用于根据与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，接收至少一个PTRS信号。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，上述通信装置包括与存储器耦合的处理器；所述处理器被配置为支持所述装置执行上述通信方法中相应的功能。存储器用于与处理器耦合，其保存所述装置必要的计算机程序(或计算机可执行指令)和/或数据。可选的，所述通信装置还可以包括通信接口用于支持所述装置与其他网元之间的通信，例如数据和/或信号的发送或接收。示例性的，通信接口可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块或其它类型的通信接口。可选的，该存储器可以位于该通信装置内部，和处理器集成在一起；也可以位于该通信装置外部。
在又一种可能的实现方式中，上述通信装置包括处理器和收发装置，所述处理器与所述收发装置耦合，所述处理器用于执行计算机程序或指令，以控制所述收发装置进行信息的接收和发送；当所述处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令时，所述处理器还用于通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令实现上述方法。其中，所述收发装置可以为收发器、收发电路、接口电路或输入输出接口，用于接收来自所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至所述处理器或将来自所述处理器的信号发送给所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置。当所述通信装置为芯片时，所述收发装置为收发电路或输入输出接口。
当上述通信装置为芯片时，发送单元可以是输出单元，比如输出电路或者通信接口；接收单元可以是输入单元，比如输入电路或者通信接口。当所述通信装置为终端时，发送单元可以是发射器或发射机；接收单元可以是接收器或接收机。
结合上述第一方面至第八方面或第一方面至第八方面中的任意一种实现，在又一个可能的实现中，所述码字指示信息包括两个码字中每个码字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，当所述两个码字对应的MCS相等时，所述第一码字为预设码字。
结合上述第一方面至第八方面或第一方面至第八方面中的任意一种实现，在又一个可能的实现中，所述两个码字分别为码字0和码字1，所述预设码字为所述码字0。
结合上述第一方面至第八方面或第一方面至第八方面中的任意一种实现，在又一个可能的实现中，所述码字指示信息包括两个码字中每个码字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，当所述两个码字对应的MCS相等时，所述第一码字包括的DMRS端口关联的PTRS端口多于所述两个码字中的另一码字包括的DMRS端口关联的PTRS端口。
结合上述第一方面至第八方面或第一方面至第八方面中的任意一种实现，在又一个可能的实现中，所 述码字指示信息包括两个码字中每个码字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，当所述两个码字对应的MCS相等时，所述第一码字为所述两个码字中包括的DMRS端口关联的PTRS端口较多的码字。结合上述第一方面至第八方面或第一方面至第八方面中的任意一种实现，在又一个可能的实现中，当所述两个码字对应的MCS相等时，且两个码字对应中包括的DMRS端口关联的PTRS端口数量也相等时，所述第一码字为预设码字。
结合上述第一方面至第八方面或第一方面至第八方面中的任意一种实现，在又一个可能的实现中，所述两个码字分别为码字0和码字1，所述预设码字为所述码字0。
结合上述第一方面至第八方面或第一方面至第八方面中的任意一种实现，在又一个可能的实现中，所述码字指示信息包括两个码字中每个码字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，当所述两个码字对应的MCS相等时，若两个码字中的码字0包括的层对应的DMRS端口作为第一PTRS端口的候选DMRS端口，所述第一PTRS端口的数量为M0；若码字1包括的层对应的DMRS端口作为第一PTRS端口的候选DMRS端口，所述第一PTRS端口的数量为M1；若M1>M0，所述第一码字为码字1；否则，所述第一码字为码字0。
第九方面，提供了一种通信系统，所述通信系统包括如第五方面所述的通信装置和第六方面所述的通信装置。
第十方面，提供了一种通信系统，所述通信系统包括如第七方面所述的通信装置和第八方面所述的通信装置。
第十一方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，该程序或指令被处理器执行时，如第一方面、第二方面、第三方面、第四方面中的任一方面或任一种实现所述的方法被执行。
第十二方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，当其在计算设备上执行时，使得如第一方面、第二方面、第三方面、第四方面中的任一方面或任一种实现所述的方法被执行。
第十三方面，提供一种电路，该电路与存储器耦合，该电路被用于执行上述第一方面、第二方面、第三方面、第四方面中的任一方面或任一种实现所述的方法。该电路可包括芯片电路。
附图说明
图1为本申请涉及的一种通信系统的示意图；
图2为DMRS的配置类型的示意图；
图3为对DMRS端口进行频分双工-正交掩码扩容的示意图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图5a为本申请实施例提供的一个示例的PTRS端口与PUSCH端口的关联示意图；
图5b为本申请实施例提供的另一个示例的PTRS端口与PUSCH端口的关联示意图；
图6a为本申请实施例提供的又一个示例的PTRS端口与PUSCH端口的关联示意图；
图6b为本申请实施例提供的又一个示例的PTRS端口与PUSCH端口的关联示意图；
图7为本申请实施例提供的又一个示例的PTRS端口与PUSCH端口的关联示意图；
图8为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图9a为本申请实施例提供的一个示例的8流，且PTRS端口数量为2时，PTRS-DMRS关联的示意图；
图9b为本申请实施例提供的另一个示例的8流，且PTRS端口数量为2时，PTRS-DMRS关联的示意图；
图9c为本申请实施例提供的又一个示例的8流，且PTRS端口数量为2时，PTRS-DMRS关联的示意图；
图10为本申请实施例提供的一个示例的6流时PTRS-DMRS关联的示意图；
图11为本申请实施例提供的一个示例的4流时PTRS-DMRS关联的示意图；
图12a为本申请实施例提供的一个示例的8流，且PTRS端口数量为4时，PTRS-DMRS关联的示意图；
图12b为本申请实施例提供的另一个示例的8流，且PTRS端口数量为4时，PTRS-DMRS关联的示意图；
图13为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图14a为申请实施例示例的又一种PTRS-DMRS关联的示意图；
图14b为申请实施例示例的又一种PTRS-DMRS关联的示意图；
图14c为申请实施例示例的又一种PTRS-DMRS关联的示意图；
图15为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图16为本申请实施例提供的一个简化的终端的结构示意图；
图17为本申请实施例提供的一个简化的网络设备的结构示意图；
图18为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面结合本申请实施例中的附图对本申请实施例进行描述。
本申请提供的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统、第五代(5th generation，5G)通信系统(或称为新无线(new radio，NR)系统)以及未来的其他通信系统如第六代(6th generation，6G)通信系统等。可选的，本申请所提供的技术方案还可以应用于物联网(internet of things，IoT)系统、窄带物联网(narrow band internet of things，NB-IoT)系统等。
图1给出了本申请涉及的一种通信系统的示意图。该通信系统包括至少一个网络设备和至少一个终端。在图1中，一个网络设备和多个终端(图中示例了用户设备(user equipment，UE)1～UE5)组成一个通信系统。在该通信系统中，UE1～UE5都可以和网络设备进行通信，其链路环境包括了上行、下行以及边路(side-link)传输，链路中传输的信息包括了实际传输的数据信息，以及用于指示或调度实际数据的控制信息。同时，UE3，UE4和UE5也可以组成一个通信系统，其链路传输环境和前述一致，具体的信息交互依托于网络的配置方式。
上述网络设备可以是能和终端通信的设备。网络设备可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。包括但不限于：基站例如节点B(NodeB)、演进型基站，例如演进节点B(eNodeB)、第五代(the fifth generation，5G)通信系统中的基站、未来通信系统中的基站或网络设备、WiFi系统中的接入节点、无线中继节点、无线回传节点等。网络设备还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network，CRAN)场景下的无线控制器。网络设备还可以是小站，传输节点(transmission reference point，TRP)等。本申请的实施例对网络设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。
该网络设备还可以是无线局域网(wireless fidelity，WiFi)系统中的接入节点、无线中继节点、无线回传节点等。该网络设备还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network，CRAN)场景下的无线控制器。
为便于描述，下文将以基站为例来说明本申请所涉及的网络设备等。在基站的一些部署中，基站可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit，CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)等。在基站的另一些部署中，CU还可以划分为CU-控制面(control plane，CP)和CU-用户面(user plane，UP)等。在基站的另一些部署中，基站还可以是开放的无线接入网(openradioaccessnetwork，ORAN)架构等，本申请对于基站的具体部署方式不作限定。
上述终端是一种具有无线收发功能的设备，可以部署在陆地上，包括室内或室外、手持、穿戴或车载；也可以部署在水面上，如轮船上等；还可以部署在空中，如飞机、气球和卫星上等。所述终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self-driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等等。本申请的实施例对应用场景不做限定。终端设备有时也可以称为用户设备、接入终端设备、UE单元、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端设备、移动设备、终端(terminal)、无线通信设备、UE代理或UE装置等。
可选的，图1所示的通信系统中，终端与终端之间还可以通过设备到设备(device to device，D2D)、车与任何事物(vehicle-to-everything，V2X)或机器到机器(machine to machine，M2M)等技术进行通信，本申请对于终端与终端之间的DMRS端口指示方法不作限定。
示例性地，本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。
下面介绍一下本申请的实施例可能涉及的概念：
DMRS：
DMRS用于估计数据信道(如物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel，PUSCH)或物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel，PDSCH))或控制信道(如物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel，PUCCH)或物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH))经历的等效信道矩阵，从而用于数据的检测和解调。以PUSCH为例，DMRS通常与发送的数据信号进行相同的预编码，从而保证DMRS与数据经历相同的等效信道。假设发送端发送的DMRS向量为s，发送的数据符号向量为x，DMRS与数据进行相同的预编码操作(乘以相同的预编码矩阵P)，接收端相应的接收信号向量可 以表示为：
数据：
DMRS：
可以看到，对于数据信号和参考信号，经历的等效信道均为接收端基于已知的DMRS向量s，利用信道估计算法(如最小二乘法(least squares，LS)信道估计，最小均方误差(minimum mean square error，MMSE)信道估计等)可以获得对等效信道估计。基于等效信道可以完成数据信号的MIMO均衡和后续解调。
由于DMRS用于估计等效信道其维度为NR×R，其中NR为接收天线数目，R为传输流数(也称为传输层数，空间层数或秩(rank))。通常来说，一个DMRS端口与一个空间层相对应。一个DMRS端口对应一组DMRS符号，或者对应一组DMRS序列。所述DMRS符号包含多个DMRS符号元素，对应映射在相应的时频资源上进行传输。对于传输流数为R的MIMO传输，对应的DMRS端口数目为R。为了保证信道估计的质量，通常不同DMRS端口为正交端口。不同DMRS端口对应的DMRS符号在频域、时频或码域的至少一个域上正交。
在本申请的一些场景中，“传输层数”和“rank”表示相同的含义，可以相互替换使用。
在本申请的一些场景中，天线端口和DMRS端口表示相同的含义，可以相互替换使用。
NR协议中的DMRS时频资源映射方式：
由于DMRS会额外占用时频资源，因此需要尽可能降低DMRS的开销。多个DMRS端口对应的DMRS资源为了减少相互的干扰，往往通过频分复用(frequency division multiplexing，FDM)，时分复用(time division multiplexing，TDM)或者码分复用(code division multiplexing，CDM)的方式映射在预设的时频资源。目前5G NR支持2种DMRS资源映射类型。对于类型1(Type 1)DMRS，最大可支持8个正交端口；对于类型2(Type 2)DMRS，最大可支持12个正交端口。对于一个DMRS端口，为了对不同的时频资源进行信道估计，保证信道估计质量，需要在多个时频资源内发送多个DMRS符号。DMRS在时域上可以占用至少1个正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)符号，在频域上占用的带宽与调度的数据信号的调度带宽相同。一个端口对应的多个DMRS符号对应一个参考信号序列，一个参考信号序列包括多个参考信号序列元素。DMRS参考信号序列可以为gold序列。以DMRS参考信号序列为gold序列为例，参考信号序列中第n个元素r(n)可以通过下式生成：
其中，伪随机序列c(n)可以是序列长度为31的gold序列，对于输出长度为MPN的序列c(n)，n＝0,1,...,MPN-1，可以定义为：
c(n)＝(x1(n+NC)+x2(n+NC))mod 2
x1(n+31)＝(x1(n+3)+x1(n))mod2
x2(n+31)＝(x2(n+3)+x2(n+2)+x2(n+1)+x2(n))mod 2  ……公式4
其中，NC＝1600。第一个m序列x1(n)可以初始化为x1(0)＝1,x1(n)＝0,n＝1,2,...,30。第二个m序列x2(n)由参数cinit初始化。cinit可以定义为：
这里l表示一个时隙内包含的OFDM符号索引，表示一个系统帧内的时隙索引， 可以由高层信令进行配置。与小区标识(identification，ID)有关，通常可以等于小区ID，为初始化参数，取值可以为0或1。λ表示DMRS端口对应的码分复用组索引。
一个端口对应的DMRS参考信号序列通过预设的时频资源映射规则，与对应的掩码序列相乘后映射到对应的时频资源上。在目前NR协议中，定义了2类DMRS配置方式，包括Type 1 DMRS和Type 2 DMRS。
对于端口p，对应的参考信号序列中第m个参考序列元素r(m)，按照如下规则映射至索引为(k,l)p,μ的资源粒子(resource element，RE)上。其中，索引为(k,l)p,μ的RE在时域上对应一个时隙内的索引为l的OFDM符号，在频域上对应索引为k的子载波，映射规则满足：


k′＝0,1；

n＝0,1,…；
l′＝0,1。
其中，μ为子载波间隔参数，为映射至索引为(k,l)p,μ的RE上端口p对应的DMRS信号符号，为DMRS信号符号占用的起始OFDM符号的符号索引或参考OFDM符号的符号索引。为功率缩放因子，wt(l′)为索引为l’的OFDM符号对应的时域掩码元素,wf(k′)为索引为k’的子载波对应的频域掩码元素，m＝2n+k′，Δ为子载波偏移因子。
对于配置类型1(Type 1 DMRS)映射规则中，DMRS端口p对应的wf(k′)、wt(l′),以及Δ的取值，可以根据表1确定：
表1类型1 DMRS参数取值
其中，类型1 DMRS最大可支持8个正交端口(1000～1007)，p表示DMRS端口号，λ表示DMRS端口对应的码分复用组索引，Δ为子载波偏移因子，wt(l′)为索引为l’的OFDM符号对应的时域掩码元素,wf(k′)为索引为k’的子载波对应的频域掩码元素。
对于配置类型2(Type 2 DMRS)映射规则中，DMRS端口p对应的wf(k′)、wt(l′),以及Δ的取值，可以根据表2确定：
表2类型2 DMRS参数取值
其中，类型2 DMRS最大可支持12个正交端口(1000～1011)，λ为端口p所属的码分复用组的索引，同一码分复用组内的DMRS端口占用的时频资源相同。按照式(1)，Type 1单符号DMRS和双符号DMRS的时频资源映射方式如图2左边起第1幅图和第2幅图所示。
如图2左边起第1幅图所示，对于单符号DMRS(对应l′＝0)，最大支持4端口，DMRS资源占据一个OFDM符号。4个DMRS端口分为2个码分复用组(CDM group)，其中CDM group 0包含port 0和port 1；CDM group 1包含port 2和port 3。CDM group 0和CDM group 1是频分复用(映射在不同的频域资源上)。CMD group内包含的DMRS端口映射在相同的时频资源上。CMD group内包含的DMRS端口对应的参考信号通过正交掩码(orthogonal cover code，OCC)进行区分，从而保证CDM group内DMRS port的正交性，从而抑制了不同天线端口上传输DMRS之间的干扰。具体地，port 0和port 1位于相同的RE内，在频域以梳齿的方式进行资源映射，即port 0和port 1占用的相邻的频域资源之间间隔一个子载波。对于一个DMRS端口，占用的相邻的2个RE对应一个长度为2的OCC码字序列。例如，对于子载波0和子载波2，port 0和port 1采用一组长度为2的OCC码字序列(+1+1和+1-1)。类似地，port 2和port 3位于相同的RE内，在频域以梳齿的方式映射在port 0和port 1未占用的RE上。对于子载波1和子载波3，port 2和port 3采用一组长度为2的OCC码字序列(+1+1和+1-1)。
如图2左边起第2幅图所示，对于双符号DMRS，最大支持8端口。8个DMRS端口分为2个码分复用组，其中CDM group 0包含port 0、port 1、port 4和port 5；CDM group 1包含port 2、port 3、port 6和port 7。CDM group 0和CDM group 1是频分复用，CMD group内包含的DMRS端口对应的参考信号通过OCC进行区分。具体的，port 0、port 1、port 4和port 5位于相同的RE内，在频域以梳齿的方式进行资源映射，即port 0、port 1、port 4和port 5占用的相邻的频域资源之间间隔一个子载波。对于一个DMRS端口，占用的相邻的2个子载波和2个OFDM符号对应一个长度为4的OCC码字序列。例如，对于OFDM符号1和OFDM符号2对应的子载波0和子载波2，port 0、port 1、port 4和port 5采用一组长度为4的OCC编码(+1+1+1+1/+1+1-1-1/+1-1+1-1/+1-1-1+1)。类似地，port 2、port 3、port 6和port 7位于相同的RE内，在频域以梳齿的方式映射在port 0、port 1、port 4和port 5未占用的子载波上。对于OFDM符号1和OFDM符号2对应的子载波1和子载波3，port 2、port 3、port 6和port 7采用一组长度为4的OCC编码(+1+1+1+1/+1+1-1-1/+1-1+1-1/+1-1-1+1)。
对于配置类型(configuration type)2，单符号DMRS和双符号DMRS的时频资源映射方式如图2左边起第3幅图和第4幅图所示。如图2左边起第3幅图所示，对于单符号Type 2 DMRS，最大支持6端口。6个DMRS端口分为3个码分复用组，CDM group间采用频分复用，CDM内包含的DMRS端口所对应的参考信号通过OCC保证正交性。其中CDM group 0包含port 0和port 1；CDM group 1包含port 2和port 3；CDM group 2包含port 4和port 5。CDM group间是频分复用(映射在不同的频域资源上)。CMD group内包含的DMRS端口所对应的参考信号映射在相同的时频资源上。CMD group内包含的DMRS端口对应的参考信号通过OCC进行区分。对于一个DMRS端口，其对应的DMRS参考信号在频域映射在多个包含连续2个子载波的资源子块内，相邻的资源子块之间在频域间隔4个子载波。具体地，port 0和port 1位于相同的RE内，以梳齿的方式进行资源映射。以频域资源粒度为1资源块(resource block，RB)为例，port0和port 1占用子载波0、子载波1、子载波6和子载波7。port 2和port 3占用子载波2、子载波3、子载波8和子载波9。port 4和port 5占用子载波4、子载波5、子载波10和子载波11。对于一个CDM组内包含的2个DMRS端口，在相邻的2个子载波内对应长度为2的OCC码字序列(+1+1和+1-1)。
如图2左边起第4幅图所示，对于双符号Type 2 DMRS，最大支持12端口。12个DMRS端口分为3个CDM group，CDM group间采用频分复用，CDM内包含的DMRS端口对应的参考信号通过OCC保证正交性。其中CDM group 0包含port 0、port 1、port 6和port 7；CDM group 1包含port 2、port 3、port 8和port 9；CDM group 2包含port 4、port 5、port 10和port 11。CDM group间是频分复用(映射在不同的频域资源上)。CMD group内包含的DMRS端口所对应的参考信号映射在相同的时频资源上。CMD group内包含的DMRS端口对应的参考信号通过OCC进行区分。对于一个DMRS端口，其对应的DMRS参考信号在频域映射在多个包含连续2个子载波的资源子块内，相邻的所述资源子块之间在频域间隔4个子载波。具体的，一个CDM group包含的端口位于相同的RE内，在频域以梳齿的方式进行资源映射。以频域资源粒度为1RB为例，port 0、port 1、port 6和port 7占用OFDM符号1和OFDM符号2对应的子载波0、子载波1、子载波6和子载波7。port 2、port 3、port 8和port 9占用OFDM符号1和OFDM符号2对应的子载波2、子载波3、子载波8和子载波9。port 4、port 5、port 10和port 11占用OFDM符号1和OFDM符号2对应的子载波4、子载波5、子载波10和子载波11。对于一个CDM组内包含的4个DMRS端口， 在2个OFDM符号对应的相邻的2个子载波内对应长度为4的OCC码字序列(+1+1+1+1/+1+1-1-1/+1-1+1-1/+1-1-1+1)。
随着未来无线通信设备部署更加密集，终端数目进一步增长，对MIMO传输流数提出了更高的需求。此外，后续大规模输入输出(massive MIMO)系统的不断演进，收发天线数目进一步增加(网络设备发送天线数目支持128发送天线(transmission antenna，T)或256T，终端接收天线数目8接收天线(receiving antenna，R))，信道信息获取更加精准，可以进一步支持更高的传输流数以提升MIMO系统的频谱效率。以上方面势必需要更多的DMRS端口来支撑更高的传输流数(大于12流)。随着传输流数的提升，对于信道估计的准确性要求更高。而目前最大12个正交端口难以保证大于12流的传输的较好性能。
扩充现有正交DMRS端口数目的最简单的方法就是增加DMRS占用的时频资源。这种方法可以保证每个DMRS端口所对应的DMRS符号数目不变，然而DMRS开销的成倍增加也会成倍降低系统的频谱效率。另一种方法是在保证相同时频资源(开销)的情况下，复用更多的正交DMRS端口对应的DMRS资源。为了不增加额外时频资源开销，在现有NR DMRS端口基础上，进一步通过码分复用增强(增加相同时频资源内更多的DMRS序列数量)引入新的DMRS端口，是其中一种有效的技术方案。
码分复用是一种在相同的时频资源内引入更多的正交DMRS端口数量的有效方法。对应现有的NR DMRS设计准则，一种可能的码分复用实现方法如下。这里以单符号Type2 DMRS为例，对于其他的DMRS配置类型，同样可以按照下面的方式进行频分双工-正交掩码(frequency division-orthogonal cover code，FD-OCC)扩容。该扩容方式对应的图样如图3所示。
如图3所示，左图为现有NR协议的DMRS端口配置。图中左上表为DMRS占用的子载波编号(identifier，ID)(第0-11号子载波)和对应的端口索引，左下图则以端口P0和端口P1为例，说明了对应的DMRS掩码设计方式。以DMRS端口P0和P1为例，在一个资源块(resource block，RB)内占用的频域子载波编号为{0，1，6，7}，P0端口对应的掩码序列为{+1，+1，+1，+1}，P1端口对应的掩码序列为{+1，-1，+1，-1}，P1端口与P0端口占用的时频资源相同，通过码分正交性与P0端口在同一时频资源上传输。这里的掩码序列指的是表1中对应的频域掩码序列。
对应左侧现有方案，右侧上表和右下图给出了一种新的DMRS的FD-OCC扩容方案。在同样的时频资源上，这里以图中属于同一个CDM组0的DMRS端口P0、P1、P6、P7为例。对应同一个CDM组，该方案中的DMRS端口相较于上述现有方案的DMRS端口在同样的时频资源内通过码分复用多复用一组端口(2端口：P6、P7)，在子载波编号{0，1，6，7}上对应的掩码序列为{+1，+1，-1，-1}和{+1，-1，-1，+1}。其余CDM组复用方式与CDM组0相同。通过这种技术手段，可以达到同样的时频资源内复用的DMRS端口总数翻倍的效果。
该扩容方法可以通过同样的序列和映射方式，自然扩展至单/双符号、Type1/2 DMRS配置类型。上述扩容方式对应的DMRS端口和时频资源映射如下表3-6所示。
示例性地，该扩容方法采用的一种序列为干扰随机化序列：
表3不同DMRS端口对应的参数取值(Type1)
表4不同DMRS端口对应的参数取值(Type2)

示例性地，该扩容方法采用的另一种序列为Walsh序列：
表5不同DMRS端口对应的参数取值(Type1)
表6不同DMRS端口对应的参数取值(Type2)
PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间存在关联关系，在PTRS端口发送PTRS信号的时频资源位置可根据关联的DMRS端口确定，PTRS信号与DMRS信号对应的基序列相同，即只包含DMRS信号生成公式(即上述公式5)中对应的r(2n+k′)，不包含时频掩码wf(k′)和wt(l′)。
具体地，PTRS端口的时频资源映射如下：
其中，l是PTRS信号对应的时域位置；k是PTRS信号对应的频域位置；p是端口号；μ是子载波间隔；βPT-RS,i是功率系数；rk是基序列。
其中，PTRS信号对应的时域位置l的取值与时域密度(time density)LPT-RS等参数有关，本申请不作详细描述。
其中，PTRS信号对应的频域位置k的取值公式如下：
其中，若NRBmodKPT-RS＝0，则
否则，
其中，i＝0,1,2…(为PTRS存在的RB偏移量索引)。
是每个PTRS端口存在的RB内，该PTRS端口以及与之关联的DMRS端口之间的子载波偏移量，配置的如下表7所示：
表7参数
当前NR协议规定的PTRS端口可以关联的候选DMRS端口如上表7所示。对于Type1 DMRS，候选的DMRS端口为1000,1001,1002,1003；对于Type2 DMRS，候选的DMRS端口为1000,1001,1002,1003,1004,1005。
对于每种DMRS配置类型，可以通过高层信令配置以下任意一种子载波偏移量：offset00、offset01、offset10、offset11。
根据表7，若配置的子载波偏移量是offset00，则PTRS端口与关联的DMRS端口对应在发送RB内的频域起始子载波相同(子载波偏移量为0)；若配置的是其它子载波偏移量取值，例如是offset01，则PTRS端口与关联的DMRS端口的对应在发送RB内的频域起始子载波偏移2个子载波；以此类推。
其中，可以由高层参数“相位追踪参考信号-下行配置(PTRS-DownlinkConfig)”中的资源元素偏移(resourceElementOffset)字段配置offset01、offset10、offset11中的任意一种子载波偏移量。如果高层参数PTRS-DownlinkConfig中没有resourceElementOffset这个字段，则默认子载波偏移量为“offset00”。
在上述PTRS对应的频域位置k的取值公式中：
nRNTI是当次DCI调度DMRS端口对应的无线网络临时标识(radio network temporary identity，RNTI)取值。
NRB是当次调度的RB个数。
KPT-RS∈{2,4}是PTRS频域密度(frequency density)，单位为RB。
对应上述PTRS端口占用的时频资源中的时域密度LPT-RS，NR协议定义其取值范围如下表8所示：
表8 PT-RS的时域密度作为被调度带宽的函数
其中，lMCS为当次调度的MCS，ptrs-MCS1～4为高层配置的MCS阈值范围，LPT-RS为前述PTRS时域存在的密度，表示一个时隙(slot)内PTRS出现的符号间隔，取值为1即为PTRS在每个时域OFDM符号上都发送。
对应上述PTRS端口占用的时频资源中的频域密度KPT-RS，NR协议定义其取值范围如下表9所示：
表9 PT-RS的频域密度作为被调度带宽的函数
其中，NRB为当次调度的RB个数，NRB0～1为高层配置的RB阈值范围，KPT-RS为前述PTRS频域存在的密度，表示一次调度带宽内PTRS出现的RB间隔，取值为2即为PTRS在每两个频域RB上发送一次。
下面以DMRS配置类型为类型2、单符号进行FD-OCC扩容后的DMRS端口为例，描述PTRS端口0对应的传输时频资源，如表10所示：
表10示例的PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系

在表10中，PTRS端口关联的是DMRS端口1000，PTRS频域密度是2RB(1RB＝12RE)，PTRS时域密度是2个OFDM符号，且配置的PTRS端口关联的DMRS端口对应的子载波偏移量是offset00，则PTRS端口0的时频位置如表10所示。
关于PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，NR标准还定义了该关联关系的指示方法，如下：
DCI中的相位追踪参考信号-解调参考信号关联(PTRS-DMRS association)字段可以用于指示PTRS-DMRS的关联关系。该指示存在两种可能：0或2比特。
当PTRS-DMRS association字段为0比特，表示PTRS-DMRS association字段不存在，或最大的秩(maxRank)＝1时，由于没有配置PTRS端口或只有一个候选DMRS端口，故不需要对PTRS端口进行DMRS端口关联。
当PTRS-DMRS association字段为2比特，根据PTRS-DMRS association字段配置的最大PTRS端口数量的选择表格如下：
表11PTRS端口0对应的PTRS-DMRS关联关系
其中，表11对应PTRS端口数为1(即PTRS端口0)的配置，通过PTRS-DMRS association字段指示最大4个候选DMRS端口(即被调度的DMRS端口)中的一个，确定与该PTRS端口0关联的DMRS端口的索引，根据DMRS端口索引和前述PTRS时频资源映射规则确定PTRS序列和时频资源映射方式。
类似地，下述表12对应PTRS端口数为2(即PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1)的配置：
表12上行PTRS端口0和端口1的PTRS-DMRS关联关系
其中，PTRS-DMRS association字段的最高有效位(most significant bit，MSB)用于指示共享PTRS端口0的DMRS端口；PTRS-DMRS association字段的最低有效位(the least significant bit，LSB)用于指示共享PTRS端口1的DMRS端口。
或者，PTRS-DMRS association字段的MSB也可以用于指示共享PTRS端口1的DMRS端口；PTRS-DMRS association字段的LSB也可以用于指示共享PTRS端口0的DMRS端口。
本申请额外引入一个天线相干组的概念以进一步说明PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系。需要首先说明的是，根据现有NR协议，PTRS端口数为2的配置场景一般出现在部分相干(partial-coherent)和非相干(non-coherent)的上行预编码矩阵传输(UL Codebook based transmission)模式下；对应的，上述PTRS端口数为1的配置一般出现在全相干(full-coherent)的上行预编码矩阵传输模式下。
这里简要以下面的预编码矩阵说明一下天线相干组的物理意义。
全相干，是指所有天线端口可以发送同一流数据；
部分相干，是指部分天线端口可以发送同一流数据；
非相干，是指每个天线端口只能发送一流数据。
以下表13为例，传输预编码矩阵索引(transmission precoding matrix index，TPMI)集合对应终端4根发天线下上行4流(即4发4流)传输。预编码矩阵0(即TPMI索引＝0)对应的预编码矩阵可以理解是非相干传输，预编码矩阵1(即TPMI索引＝1)和预编码矩阵2(即TPMI索引＝2)对应的预编码矩阵可以理解是部分相干传输，预编码矩阵3(即TPMI索引＝3)和预编码矩阵4(即TPMI索引＝4)对应的预编码矩阵可以理解是全相干传输。通过这个例子，可以比较直观理解，对于4发4流的上行预编码矩阵，预编码矩阵的一行对应一个PUSCH天线端口/探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)端口，预编 码矩阵的一列对应一个上行传输流(也可以理解是一个DMRS端口)。
表13针对4流传输使用4个天线端口的预编码矩阵W
对应PTRS，对于部分相干和非相干上行预编码矩阵传输，实际发送的PTRS端口数取决于上行TPMI形态和最大流数：
对于部分相干和非相干天线配置，PUSCH端口0和PUSCH端口2共享PTRS端口0，PUSCH端口1和PUSCH端口3共享PTRS端口1(可以理解这决定了PUSCH端口对PTRS端口的映射，及PTRS在哪个PUSCH端口上发送)；同时，PTRS端口0关联到上行第’x’流，PTRS端口1关联到上行第’y’流，所述x和y根据上述表12确定(通过DCI指示)。
目前单个终端最大支持4个PUSCH/SRS端口以及最大支持上行4流传输。对于最大支持8个PUSCH/SRS端口和/或最大支持上行8流传输，如何确定PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，目前协议没有相应的解决方案。
有鉴于此，本申请提供一种通信方案，通过DCI指示至少一个PTRS端口与至少一个DMRS端口的关联关系，以及预定义至少一个PTRS端口与至少一个PUSCH/SRS端口的关联关系，从而可以准确地确定PTRS端口分别与DMRS端口、PUSCH/SRS端口之间的关联关系，提高了通信的可靠性。
如图4所示，为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图。示例性地，该方法可以包括以下步骤：
S401.网络设备发送无线资源控制信令(radio resource control，RRC)信令。
相应地，终端接收该RRC信令。
示例性地，可以由该RRC信令中的相位追踪参考信号-上行配置(PTRS-UplinkConfig)信元配置上行PTRS信号。
该RRC信令可以用于配置上行最大的PTRS端口数。示例性地，可以通过PTRS-UplinkConfig信元中的高层参数maxNrofPorts配置上行最大的PTRS端口数。
假设一个PTRS端口共享PUSCH端口的个数大于或等于一流对应的PUSCH端口个数，可以理解，当Ng＝2时，一流数据最多由4个PUSCH端口发送，则一个PTRS端口最少可以对应4个PUSCH端口，即最大的PTRS端口数<＝2。当Ng＝4时，一流数据最多由2个PUSCH端口发送，最大的PTRS端口数<＝4。
即可以得出如下Ng与PTRS端口数之间的关系：
当Ng＝1时，上行最大的PTRS端口数为1；
当Ng＝2时，上行最大的PTRS端口数为2；
当Ng＝4时，上行最大的PTRS端口数为4。
网络设备可以通过RRC信令配置Ng的数量，或者终端还可以上报Ng的数量。例如，Ng的数量为1，2或4。
可以由网络设备通过高层信令(例如，RRC信令)配置上行最大的PTRS端口数。例如，网络设备可以发送第一信息，该第一信息用于配置上行最大Q个PTRS端口数，Q≤M。该第一信息为RRC等高层信令。在上述8发8流场景中，当Ng＝1时，M可以是1；当Ng＝2时，M可以是2；当Ng＝4时，M可以是4。示例性地，上行最大的PTRS端口数为1时，则网络设备配置“n1”；上行最大的PTRS端口数为2时，则网络设备配置“n1”、“n2”或“n2”；上行最大的PTRS端口数为4时，则网络设备配置“n1”、“n2”、“n4”或“n4”。
也可以由终端上报支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数。例如，终端上报支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数 为M，M为正整数。
示例性地，终端上报支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数，最大的PTRS端口数为1时，则终端上报“n1”；最大的PTRS端口数为2时，则终端上报“n1”、“n2”或“n2”；最大的PTRS端口数为4时，则终端上报“n1”、“n2”、“n4”或“n4”。
该RRC信令还可以用于配置终端当前的PTRS端口。
该RRC信令还可以用于配置PTRS端口以及与之关联的DMRS端口之间的子载波偏移量。该子载波偏移量可以是上述表7中的offset00、offset01、offset10、offset11中的任意一种。示例性地，可以由高层参数“相位追踪参考信号-下行配置(PTRS-DownlinkConfig)”中的资源元素偏移(resourceElementOffset)字段配置offset01、offset10、offset11中的任意一种子载波偏移量。如果高层参数PTRS-DownlinkConfig中没有resourceElementOffset这个字段，则默认子载波偏移量为“offset00”。
该RRC信令还可以用于配置一个或多个RB阈值范围。如表8中所示，RRC信令配置以下RB阈值范围：NRB0～1。示例性的，RRC字段可以为frequencyDensity，取值可以为整数{1…276}中的两个值：
SEQUENCE(SIZE(2))OF INTEGER(1…276) OPTIONAL,--Need S
该RRC信令还可以用于配置一个或多个MCS阈值范围。如表9中所示，RRC信令配置以下MCS阈值范围：ptrs-MCS1～4。
示例性的，RRC字段可以为timeDensity。
取值可以为整数{0…29}中的3个值：
SEQUENCE(SIZE(3))OF INTEGER(1…29) OPTIONAL,--Need S
本实施例中，至少一个PTRS端口中的每个PTRS端口对应一个或多个Ng组。一个或多个Ng组中的每个Ng对应一个或多个PUSCH端口，或一个或多个Ng组中的每个Ng对应一个或多个SRS端口。Ng和SRS端口的对应关系，与Ng和PUSCH端口的对应关系类似，本实施例以Ng和PUSCH端口的对应关系为示例进行描述。网络设备可以向终端发送以下至少一个信息：上行PUSCH的秩，TPMI。终端可以根据上行PUSCH的秩和TPMI，确定上述预编码矩阵，从而确定至少一个PTRS端口。其中，预编码矩阵包括X个PUSCH端口，以及Y个数据层，每个数据层对应一个DMRS端口，X大于4；或，X大于4且Y大于4。其中，X个PUSCH端口是终端上报的或网络设备配置的，X个PUSCH端口根据预定义规则与上述M个PTRS端口关联。当Y大于4时，所述PUSCH传输可以对应两个码字，其中假设最大8层的数据层索引为0～7，码字到数据层的映射规则如下表所示：
根据上表可以理解，一个码字对应多个数据层，其中每个数据层对应一个码字。同时每个数据层对应一个DMRS端口，也可以理解，一个码字对应多个DMRS端口，每个DMRS端口对应一个码字。即权1中的‘第一DMRS端口为第一码字对应的DMRS端口’可以理解为，通过上述TPMI及码字到数据层的映射，终端设备可以确定每个码字对应的DMRS端口，可以确定第一码字对应的第一DMRS端口。同理，终端可以确定第二码字对应的第二DMRS端口。
示例性地，当Ng＝1时，终端支持/网络设备配置的最大的PTRS端口数为1，网络设备可以通过高层信令给终端配置1个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0)，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口0可以与PUSCH端口0-7关联。
示例性地，当Ng＝2时，网络设备配置或预定义Ng0对应PUSCH端口0-3，Ng1对应PUSCH端口4-7。本实施例对Ng与PUSCH端口的对应关系的描述仅为示例，并不作限定。终端支持/网络设备配置的最大的PTRS端口数为2，网络设备可以给终端配置1个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0)，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口0可以与PUSCH端口0-7关联，PTRS端口0对应2个Ng；网络设备也可以给终端配置2个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1)，且如图5a所示，PUSCH端口0-3对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口4-7对应另一个Ng，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口0可以与PUSCH端口0-3关联，PTRS端口1可以与PUSCH端口4-7关联，1个PTRS端口对应1个Ng。
当Ng＝2时，网络设备也可以配置或预定义Ng0对应PUSCH端口0、2、4、6，Ng1对应PUSCH端口1、3、5、7。本实施例对Ng与PUSCH端口的对应关系的描述仅为示例，并不作限定。终端支持/网络 设备配置的最大的PTRS端口数为2，网络设备可以给终端配置1个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0)，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口0可以与PUSCH端口0-7关联，PTRS端口0对应2个Ng；网络设备也可以给终端配置2个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1)，且如图5b所示，PUSCH端口0、2、4、6对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口1、3、5、7对应另一个Ng，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口0可以与PUSCH端口0、2、4、6关联，PTRS端口1可以与PUSCH端口1、3、5、7关联，1个PTRS端口对应1个Ng。
当Ng＝4时，终端支持/网络设备配置的最大的PTRS端口数为4，网络设备可以给终端配置1个、2个、3个或4个PTRS端口。当网络设备给终端配置1个、2个或3个PTRS端口时，1个PTRS端口可以对应多个Ng。
例如，如图6a所示，Ng＝4，其中，PUSCH端口0-1属于Ng0，PUSCH端口2-3属于Ng1，PUSCH端口4-5属于Ng2，以及PUSCH端口6-7属于Ng4，网络设备给终端配置4个PTRS端口，1个PTRS端口对应1个Ng，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口p0对应PUSCH端口0-1，PTRS端口p1对应PUSCH端口2-3，PTRS端口p2对应PUSCH端口4-5，以及PTRS端口p3对应PUSCH端口6-7。
又例如，如图6b所示，Ng＝4，其中，PUSCH端口0、4属于Ng0，PUSCH端口1、5属于Ng1，PUSCH端口2、6属于Ng2，以及PUSCH端口3、7属于Ng4，网络设备给终端配置4个PTRS端口，1个PTRS端口对应1个Ng，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口p0对应PUSCH端口0、4，PTRS端口p1对应PUSCH端口1、5，PTRS端口p2对应PUSCH端口2、6，以及PTRS端口p3对应PUSCH端口3、7。
又例如，如图6b所示，Ng＝4，其中，PUSCH端口0、4属于Ng0，PUSCH端口1、5属于Ng1，PUSCH端口2、6属于Ng2，以及PUSCH端口3、7属于Ng4，网络设备给终端配置2个PTRS端口，1个PTRS端口对应2个Ng，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口p0对应PUSCH端口0、2、4、6，PTRS端口p1对应PUSCH端口1、3、5、7。
又例如，如图7所示，Ng＝4，其中，PUSCH端口0-1属于Ng0，PUSCH端口2-3属于Ng1，PUSCH端口4-5属于Ng2，以及PUSCH端口6-7属于Ng4，网络设备给终端配置2个PTRS端口，1个PTRS端口对应2个Ng，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口p0对应PUSCH端口0-3，PTRS端口p1对应PUSCH端口4-6。
可以看出，在本实施例中，1个PTRS端口可以对应1个或多个Ng，其中，每个Ng对应多个PUSCH端口。而现有技术中，即4发4流场景中，对于非相干传输，1个PTRS端口对应2个Ng，1个Ng对应1个PUSCH端口；对于部分相干传输，1个PTRS端口对应1个Ng，1个Ng对应2个PUSCH端口；对于完全相干传输，1个PTRS端口对应1个Ng，1个Ng对应4个PUSCH端口。
示例性的，对于PTRS端口与PUSCH端口的对应关系，也可以直接简历PTRS端口到PUSCH端口之间的关联关系。如，PTRS端口0对应PUSCH端口0、1、4、5，PTRS端口1对应PUSCH端口2、3、6、7。则，PTRS端口0可以关联PUSCH端口0、1、4、5传输数据层对应的DMRS端口，PTRS端口1可以关联PUSCH端口2、3、6、7传输数据层对应的DMRS端口；进一步的，PUSCH端口0、1、4、5传输的数据层可以对应码字0，PUSCH端口2、3、6、7传输的数据层可以对应码字1，则PTRS端口0可以对应码字0，PTRS端口可以对应码字1。即，对应权要4和5中，所述第一码字与所述第一PTRS端口对应，所述第二码字与第二PTRS端口对应。
示例性的，以上述PUSCH端口0、1、4、5传输的数据层对应码字0，PUSCH端口2、3、6、7传输的数据层对应码字1，则PTRS端口0对应码字0，PTRS端口可以码字1为例。此时X取值为0，分别对应PUSCH端口索引0～7，Y取值最大为8，对应8个PUSCH传输数据层。此时，PUSCH端口0、1、4、5可以传输的最大层数为取值可以为L1，PUSCH端口2、3、6、7可以传输的最大层数为取值可以为L2；可以理解，L1和L2的最大取值均为4；同时，由于每个PUSCH数据层对应一个DMRS端口，即PUSCH端口0、1、4、5对应的最大DMRS端口取值为L1，PUSCH端口2、3、6、7对应的最大DMRS端口取值为L2；也可以理解PTRS端口0对应的最大DMRS端口取值为L1，PTRS端口1对应的最大DMRS端口取值为L2；即权10中第一PTRS端口共享的第一DMRS端口取值为L1，第二PTRS端口共享的第二DMRS端口取值为L2。
需要说明的是，上述PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联关系，以及PTRS端口与码字之间的关联关系，具体端口号和码字索引仅为示例，不作限定。
上述描述了PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联关系，PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联关系可以是根据预定义规则确定的。下面描述PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系：
S402.网络设备发送DCI。
相应地，终端接收该DCI。
本实施例可以适用于上行大于4个PUSCH/SRS端口的场景，例如，可以是5～8个PUSCH/SRS端口；或者适用于上行大于4个PUSCH/SRS端口且大于4流的场景，例如，可以是5～8个PUSCH/SRS端口以及5～8流的任意组合的场景。
以上行8个上行PUSCH/SRS端口以及8流(简称8发8流)为例，Ng的候选取值有{1,2,4}三种。对应上述对于天线相干组的定义，可以理解Ng取值为{2,4}时为部分相干，对应如下的预编码矩阵形态：
Ng＝2时，示例性地，预编码矩阵为：
Ng＝2时，也可以为如图5b所示的预编码矩阵，这里仅以上述预编码矩阵为例进行描述
Ng＝4时，示例性地，预编码矩阵为：
Ng＝4时，也可以为如图6b所示的预编码矩阵，这里仅以上述预编码矩阵为例进行描述。
针对不同的Ng，网络设备给终端配置的当前的PTRS端口数的不同，PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系不同：
针对上述示例，PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系可以设计如下：
1)当Ng＝1，PTRS端口数＝1时，PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系如下表所示：
表14 PTRS-DMRS关联关系
网络设备向终端发送DCI，该DCI用于指示至少一个PTRS端口与至少一个DMRS端口的关联关系。具体地，通过DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段用于指示PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系。示例性地，网络设备给终端配置的当前的PTRS端口数为1时，DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段可以为3比特，用于指示8种取值中的任意一种。
2)当Ng＝2，PTRS端口数＝2时，PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系如下表所示：
表15 PTRS-DMRS关联关系

当PTRS端口数大于1时，需要通过DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的MSB和LSB区分指示的是PTRS端口0或PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口。示例性地，对于上述PTRS-DMRS关联关系，DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的MSB用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的DMRS端口；DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的LSB用于指示与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口。或者也可以是，DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的LSB用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的DMRS端口；DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的MSB用于指示与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口。
Ng＝2，网络设备给终端配置2个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1)，且如图5a所示，PUSCH端口0-3对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口4-7对应另一个Ng，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口0可以与PUSCH端口0-3关联，PTRS端口1可以与PUSCH端口4-7关联，1个PTRS端口对应1个Ng。DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段包括MSB和LSB。其中，MSB用于指示PTRS端口0与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，LSB用于指示PTRS端口1与DMRS端口之间的关联关系。MSB、LSB分别为2比特。
3)当Ng＝4，PTRS端口数＝4时，假设2个PUSCH端口共享一个PTRS端口，则PTRS-DMRS关联关系如下表：
表16 PTRS-DMRS关联关系
当PTRS端口数大于2时，需要通过DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的2个MSB和2个LSB区分分别指示的是PTRS端口0、PTRS端口1、PTRS端口2或PTRS端口3关联的DMRS端口。示例性地，对于上述PTRS-DMRS关联关系，DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的第一个MSB用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的DMRS端口；DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的第一个LSB用于指示与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口；DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的第二个MSB用于指示与PTRS端口2关联的DMRS端口；以及DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的第二个LSB用于指示与PTRS端口3关联的DMRS端口。
对应表16所示的PTRS-DMRS关联关系，可以理解对应的上行预编码矩阵形态和PTRS端口关联关系如图6a所示。
具体地，Ng＝4，网络设备给终端配置4个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0、PTRS端口1、PTRS端口2和PTRS端口3)，且如图6a所示，PUSCH端口0-1对应Ng0，PUSCH端口2-3对应Ng1，PUSCH端口4-5对应Ng2，以及PUSCH端口6-7对应Ng3，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口0可以与PUSCH端口0-1关联，PTRS端口1可以与PUSCH端口2-3关联，PTRS端口2可以与PUSCH端口4-5关联，PTRS端口3可以与PUSCH端口6-7关联，1个PTRS端口对应1个Ng。DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段包括2个MSB和2个LSB。其中，第一个MSB用于指示PTRS端口0与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，第一个LSB用于指示PTRS端口1与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，第二个MSB用于指示PTRS端口2与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，第二个LSB用于指示PTRS端口3与DMRS端口之间的关联关系。每个MSB、每个LSB分别为1比特。
对于Ng＝4的场景，由于存在标准仅定义两个PTRS端口的可能，对应最大2个PTRS端口的情况，则如图7所示，可以新增两组Ng之间的关联关系(或直接定义PUSCH端口与PTRS端口的关联关系)，使能最大4个PUSCH端口共享一个PTRS端口，则此时也可以支持PTRS端口数量为2。
对于Ng＝4，PTRS端口数量为2的场景，其对应PTRS-DMRS关联关系如下表所示：
表17 PTRS-DMRS关联关系
有关该PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系的指示可以参考上述描述，在此不再赘述。
S403.终端根据DCI从至少一个DMRS端口中确定与至少一个PTRS端口各自关联的DMRS端口。
终端根据网络设备给终端配置的当前的PTRS端口数、不同的Ng，选择对应的PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，并根据DCI的指示，从该关联关系中确定与至少一个PTRS端口各自关联的DMRS端口。
例如，当Ng＝1，PTRS端口数＝1时，终端接收到DCI后，根据表14以及DCI，可以确定与当前的PTRS端口关联的DMRS端口。例如，对于Type1 DMRS，扩容后的被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}，假设DCI指示“01”，网络设备给终端配置的当前的PTRS端口数为PTRS端口0，则与PTRS0关联的DMRS端口为第2个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1001。
又例如，当Ng＝2，PTRS端口数＝2时，对于Type1 DMRS，扩容后的被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}，共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3}，终端接收到DCI后，假设DCI中的MSB为“10”，则终端确定与PTRS端口0关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第3个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1002；共享PTRS端口1的被调度的DMRS端口为{8,9,10,11}，假设DCI中的LSB为“01”，则终端确定与PTRS端口1关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第2个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1009。
又例如，当Ng＝4，PTRS端口数＝4时，例如，对于Type1 DMRS，扩容后的被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}，共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1}，假设DCI中的第一个MSB为“1”，则终端确定与PTRS端口0关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第2个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1001；共享PTRS端口1的被调度的DMRS端口为{2,3}，假设DCI中的第一个LSB为“0”，则终端确定与PTRS端口1关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第1个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1002；共享PTRS端口2的被调度的DMRS端口为{8,9}，假设DCI中的第二个MSB为“1”，则终端确定与PTRS端口2关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第2个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1009；共享PTRS端口3的被调度的DMRS端口为{10,11}，假设DCI中的第二个LSB为“0”，则终端确定与PTRS端口3关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第1个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1010。
进一步地，终端还可以根据确定的DMRS端口的索引、当次调度的MCS、当次调度的RB个数中的至少一项，确定PTRS信号的时频资源位置和PTRS信号序列。
具体地，网络设备可以配置终端当次调度的MCS，终端可以根据当次调度的MCS以及上述表8，确定PTRS信号的时域密度。进一步地，根据PTRS信号的时域密度和PTRS信号对应的时域位置l的取值公式，确定PTRS信号对应的时域位置l。
网络设备可以配置终端当次调度的RB个数，终端可以根据当次调度的RB个数以及上述表9，确定PTRS信号的频域密度。进一步地，根据PTRS信号的频域密度和PTRS信号对应的频域位置k的取值公式(公式7)，确定PTRS信号对应的频域位置k。
终端进一步根据PTRS信号对应的时域位置l和频域位置k，以及根据公式6，确定PTRS信号的时频资源位置。
PTRS信号与DMRS信号对应的基序列相同，即只包含DMRS信号生成公式(即上述公式5)中对应 的r(2n+k′)，不包含时频掩码wf(k′)和wt(l′)。
其中，PTRS信号的时频资源和序列映射公式可以沿用前述的描述，但与现有协议不同的是，在对DMRS端口进行扩容后，候选DMRS端口的索引表格一种可能的设计如下：
表18参数
S404.终端根据与至少一个PTRS端口各自关联的DMRS端口，通过至少一个PTRS端口发送至少一个PTRS信号。
终端根据与至少一个PTRS端口各自关联的DMRS端口，确定至少一个PTRS信号的序列，以及根据表7确定至少一个PTRS信号的时频资源位置后，在相应的PTRS端口发送PTRS信号。
示例性地，上述PTRS-DMRS关联关系用于确定PTRS信号的序列和时频资源资源，具体发送行为还是根据PTRS端口对应的序列和时频资源发送，跟DMRS端口无关。
根据本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法，通过DCI指示至少一个PTRS端口与至少一个DMRS端口的关联关系，以及预定义至少一个PTRS端口与至少一个PUSCH/SRS端口的关联关系，从而可以准确地确定PTRS端口分别与DMRS端口、PUSCH/SRS端口之间的关联关系，提高了通信的可靠性。
上述实施例描述了PTRS端口分别与DMRS端口、PUSCH/SRS端口之间的关联关系。另外，上行大于4个PUSCH/SRS端口和/或大于4流的场景，可能引入第二个码字(codeword)，在此场景下，如何确定PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，提高通信的可靠性，下述实施例将描述解决的方案。
可以理解的是，图4所示的实施例不限码字的数量，其也可能引入第二个码字。因此，下面实施例的内容也可以结合到图4所示的实施例。
如图8所示，为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图。示例性地，该方法可以包括以下 步骤：
S801.网络设备发送RRC信令。
相应地，终端接收该RRC信令。
该RRC信令用于配置以下至少一个信息：上行最大的PTRS端口数、终端当前的PTRS端口、PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的子载波偏移量、MCS阈值范围、RB阈值范围、PUSCH端口数、天线相干数。具体配置方法可以参考上述实施例中的步骤S401。
S802.网络设备发送码字指示信息。
相应地，终端接收该码字指示信息。
示例性地，网络设备可以向终端发送DCI，该DCI包括以下至少一个信息：上行PUSCH的秩，TPMI。
终端可以根据上行PUSCH的秩确定码字的数量。例如上行PUSCH的秩小于或等于4，则确定需要1个码字；上行PUSCH的秩大于4且小于或等于8，则确定需要2个码字。
其中，TPMI对应一个预编码矩阵，该预编码矩阵包括X个PUSCH端口，以及Y个数据层，每个数据层对应一个DMRS端口，X大于4；或，X大于4且Y大于4。其中，X个PUSCH端口是终端上报的或网络设备配置的，X个PUSCH端口根据预定义规则与M个PTRS端口关联。例如，网络设备配置的是8个PUSCH/SRS端口，DCI指示的传输层数是5流，则该TPMI用于指示8行5列的预编码矩阵。
综合来说，终端可以根据上行PUSCH的秩和TPMI，确定预编码矩阵，从而确定至少一个PTRS端口。具体地，PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联可参考前述实施例的描述。
本实施例适用于上行大于4个PUSCH/SRS端口以及大于4流的场景。对于上行大于4流的场景，可能引入第二个码字。
对于存在两个或多个码字的场景，本实施例考虑将其中一个码字(第一码字)的一层或多层的DMRS端口作为关联PTRS端口的候选DMRS端口。
网络设备向终端发送码字指示信息。该码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，该码字指示信息包括该第一码字对应的MCS。此外，该码字指示信息还可以包括以下至少一个信息：新数据指示(new data indicator，NDI)，冗余版本(redundancy version，RV)。
示例性地，网络设备也可以向终端发送多组码字指示信息，每组码字指示信息包括每个码字对应的MCS。终端接收到多组码字指示信息后，可以选取多个码字中最大的MCS对应的码字作为第一码字。MCS最大，则基于该码字的一层或多层对应的DMRS端口发送PTRS信号的质量最好。
下面以8流，PTRS端口数＝2为例进行示例性描述。
在一个示例中，终端根据上行PUSCH的秩和TPMI，确定预编码矩阵如图5a所示，其中，行依次对应PUSCH端口0-7，列依次对应上行传输层数/DMRS端口0-7。该预编码矩阵包括2个Ng(Ng0和Ng1)以及2个码字(CW0和CW1)。网络设备配置2个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1)。
对应该预编码矩阵，Ng数为2，终端可以上报终端支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数为1或2，这里以终端可以上报终端支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数M为2为例。可替换地，也可以是网络设备配置上行最大的PTRS端口数为2。
根据预定义规则，以如图5a所示的预编码矩阵为例，PUSCH端口0-3共享PTRS端口0，PUSCH端口4-7共享PTRS端口1。这里可以理解为，从物理上讲，PUSCH端口0-3对应的相位噪声通过PTRS端口0测量，PUSCH端口4-7对应的相位噪声通过PTRS端口1测量。可以理解的是，PTRS端口数＝2，采用如图5b所示的预编码矩阵时，可以按照本实施例示例的关联方法获取PTRS-DMRS的关联关系。
在该示例中，假设CW0对应的MCS大于CW1对应的MCS，即第一码字为CW0。
对于第一码字可能存在以下3种情况：
第一种情况为，第一码字CW0包括图9a所示的预编码矩阵的第0-3列，第二码字CW1包括图9a所示的预编码矩阵的第4-7列。则根据上述PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联关系，每个码字分别对应一个PTRS端口，即第一码字CW0对应PTRS端口0，第二码字CW1对应PTRS端口1。则第一码字CW0的4层发送的PUSCH端口0-3对应PTRS端口0，第二码字CW1的4层发送的PUSCH端口4-7对应PTRS端口1。
网络设备预先配置或终端预先存储PTRS端口0与4个被调度的DMRS端口之间的关联关系如下表：
表19 PTRS-DMRS关联关系

该取值是DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值。该PTRS-DMRS association字段可以为2比特，用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的是哪一个被调度的DMRS端口。
第二种情况为，第一码字CW0包括图9b所示的预编码矩阵的第0-2列以及第7列，第二码字CW1包括图9b所示的预编码矩阵的第3-6列。则根据上述PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联关系，两个码字各自均对应2个PTRS端口，即第一码字CW0对应PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1，第二码字CW1对应PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1。则第一码字CW0的其中3层发送的PUSCH端口0-2对应PTRS端口0，第一码字CW0的第4层发送的PUSCH端口7对应PTRS端口1；第二码字CW1的第1层发送的PUSCH端口3对应PTRS端口0，第二码字CW1的第2-4层发送的PUSCH端口4-6对应PTRS端口1。
在该情况中，对于第一码字CW0的第4层发送的PUSCH端口7对应的PTRS端口1，与该PTRS端口1关联的是预设的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1011。对于第一码字CW0的其中3层发送的PUSCH端口0-2对应的PTRS端口0，网络设备预先配置或终端预先存储PTRS端口0与3个被调度的DMRS端口之间的关联关系如下表：
表20 PTRS-DMRS关联关系
该取值是DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值。该PTRS-DMRS association字段可以为2比特，用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的是哪一个被调度的DMRS端口。
第三种情况为，第一码字CW0包括图9c所示的预编码矩阵的第0-1列以及第6-7列，第二码字CW1包括图9c所示的预编码矩阵的第2-5列。则根据上述PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联关系，两个码字各自均对应2个PTRS端口，即第一码字CW0对应PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1，第二码字CW1对应PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1。则第一码字CW0的其中第1、2层发送的PUSCH端口0-1对应PTRS端口0，第一码字CW0的第3、4层发送的PUSCH端口6、7对应PTRS端口1；第二码字CW1的第1、2层发送的PUSCH端口2-3对应PTRS端口0，第二码字CW1的第3、4层发送的PUSCH端口4-6对应PTRS端口1。
在该情况下，对于第一码字CW0的其中第1、2层发送的PUSCH端口0-1对应的PTRS端口0，以及对于第一码字CW0的第3、4层发送的PUSCH端口6、7对应PTRS端口1，网络设备预先配置或终端预先存储PTRS端口0与2个被调度的DMRS端口之间的关联关系、以及PTRS端口1与2个被调度的DMRS端口之间的关联关系如下表：
表21 PTRS-DMRS关联关系
DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段包括MSB和LSB。其中，MSB用于指示PTRS端口0与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，LSB用于指示PTRS端口1与DMRS端口之间的关联关系。MSB、LSB分别为1比特。
在上述3种情况中，可以看出，在大于4流的场景下，DCI的指示开销相比现有的4流的场景并没有增加，从而DCI的指示开销较小。
下面以6流为例进行示例性描述。
在一个示例中，终端根据上行PUSCH的秩和TPMI，确定预编码矩阵如图10所示，其中，行依次对 应PUSCH端口0-7，列依次对应上行传输层数/DMRS端口0-5。基于该预编码矩阵，可以确定该预编码矩阵包括2个Ng(Ng0和Ng1)以及2个码字(CW0和CW1)。网络设备配置2个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1)。
对应该预编码矩阵，Ng数为2，终端可以上报终端支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数为1或2，这里以终端可以上报终端支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数M为2为例。可替换地，也可以是网络设备配置上行最大的PTRS端口数为2。
根据预定义规则，如图10所示，PUSCH端口0-3共享PTRS端口0，PUSCH端口4-7共享PTRS端口1。这里可以理解为，从物理上讲，PUSCH端口0-3对应的相位噪声通过PTRS端口0测量，PUSCH端口4-7对应的相位噪声通过PTRS端口1测量。
在该示例中，假设CW0对应的MCS大于CW1对应的MCS，即第一码字为CW0。
第一码字CW0包括图10所示的预编码矩阵的第0-2列，第二码字CW1包括图10所示的预编码矩阵的第3-5列。则根据上述PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联关系，每个码字分别对应一个PTRS端口，即第一码字CW0对应PTRS端口0，第二码字CW1对应PTRS端口1。则第一码字CW0的3层发送的PUSCH端口0-3对应PTRS端口0，第二码字CW1的3层发送的PUSCH端口4-7对应PTRS端口1。
网络设备预先配置或终端预先存储PTRS端口0与3个被调度的DMRS端口之间的关联关系如下表：
表22 PTRS-DMRS关联关系
该取值是DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值。该PTRS-DMRS association字段可以为2比特，用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的是哪一个被调度的DMRS端口。
下面以4流为例进行示例性描述。
在一个示例中，终端根据上行PUSCH的秩和TPMI，确定预编码矩阵如图11所示，其中，行依次对应PUSCH端口0-7，列依次对应上行传输层数/DMRS端口0-3。基于该预编码矩阵，可以确定该预编码矩阵包括2个Ng(Ng0和Ng1)以及1个码字(CW0)。网络设备配置2个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1)。
对应该预编码矩阵，Ng数为2，终端可以上报终端支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数为1或2。可替换地，也可以是网络设备配置上行最大的PTRS端口数为1或2。这里以终端可以上报终端支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数为2进行描述。
根据预定义规则，如图11所示，PUSCH端口0-3共享PTRS端口0，PUSCH端口4-7共享PTRS端口1。这里可以理解为，从物理上讲，PUSCH端口0-3对应的相位噪声通过PTRS端口0测量，PUSCH端口4-7对应的相位噪声通过PTRS端口1测量。
第一码字CW0包括图11所示的预编码矩阵的第0-3列。则根据上述PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联关系，CW0对应2个PTRS端口，即第一码字CW0对应PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1。则第一码字CW0的2层发送的PUSCH端口0-3对应PTRS端口0，第一码字CW0的另外2层发送的PUSCH端口4-7对应PTRS端口1。
网络设备预先配置或终端预先存储PTRS端口0、PTRS端口1分别与2个被调度的DMRS端口之间的关联关系如下表：
表23 PTRS-DMRS关联关系
DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段包括MSB和LSB。其中，MSB用于指示PTRS端口0与DMRS 端口之间的关联关系，LSB用于指示PTRS端口1与DMRS端口之间的关联关系。MSB、LSB分别为1比特。
下面以8流，PTRS端口数＝4为例进行示例性描述。
在一个示例中，终端根据上行PUSCH的秩和TPMI，确定预编码矩阵如图6a所示，其中，行依次对应PUSCH端口0-7，列依次对应上行传输层数/DMRS端口0-7。该预编码矩阵包括4个Ng(Ng0～Ng3)以及2个码字(CW0和CW1)。网络设备配置4个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0～PTRS端口3)。
对应该预编码矩阵，Ng数为4，终端可以上报终端支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数为1、2、3或4，这里以终端可以上报终端支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数M为4为例。可替换地，也可以是网络设备配置上行最大的PTRS端口数为4。
根据预定义规则，如图6a所示，PUSCH端口0-1共享PTRS端口0，PUSCH端口2-3共享PTRS端口1，PUSCH端口4-5共享PTRS端口2，PUSCH端口6-7共享PTRS端口3。这里可以理解为，从物理上讲，PUSCH端口0-1对应的相位噪声通过PTRS端口0测量，PUSCH端口2-3对应的相位噪声通过PTRS端口1测量，PUSCH端口4-5对应的相位噪声通过PTRS端口2测量，以及PUSCH端口6-7对应的相位噪声通过PTRS端口3测量。
在该示例中，假设CW0对应的MCS大于CW1对应的MCS，即第一码字为CW0。
对于第一码字可能存在以下2种情况：
第一种情况为，第一码字CW0包括图12a所示的预编码矩阵的第0-2列以及第7列，第二码字CW1包括图12a所示的预编码矩阵的第3-6列。则根据上述PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联关系，每个码字分别对应三个PTRS端口，即第一码字CW0对应PTRS端口0、PTRS端口1和PTRS端口3；第二码字CW1对应PTRS端口1～PTRS端口3。则第一码字CW0的2层发送的PUSCH端口0-1对应PTRS端口0，第一码字CW0的1层发送的PUSCH端口2对应PTRS端口1，以及第一码字CW0的1层发送的PUSCH端口7对应PTRS端口3；第二码字CW1的1层发送的PUSCH端口3对应PTRS端口1，第二码字CW1的2层发送的PUSCH端口4-5对应PTRS端口2，以及第二码字CW1的1层发送的PUSCH端口6对应PTRS端口3。
网络设备预先配置或终端预先存储PTRS端口0与第一码字CW0的2层对应的2个被调度的DMRS端口之间的关联关系如下表：
表24 PTRS-DMRS关联关系
该取值是DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值。该PTRS-DMRS association字段可以为1比特，用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的是哪一个被调度的DMRS端口。
对于第一码字CW0的1层发送的PUSCH端口2对应的PTRS端口1，与该PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口为预设端口。
对于第一码字CW0的1层发送的PUSCH端口7对应的PTRS端口3，与该PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口为预设端口。
第二种情况为，第一码字CW0包括图12b所示的预编码矩阵的第0-3列，第二码字CW1包括图12b所示的预编码矩阵的第4-7列。则根据上述PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联关系，每个码字分别对应两个PTRS端口，即第一码字CW0对应PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1；第二码字CW1对应PTRS端口2和PTRS端口3。则第一码字CW0的2层发送的PUSCH端口0-1对应PTRS端口0，以及第一码字CW0的2层发送的PUSCH端口2-3对应PTRS端口1；第二码字CW1的2层发送的PUSCH端口4-5对应PTRS端口2，以及第二码字CW1的2层发送的PUSCH端口6-7对应PTRS端口3。
网络设备预先配置或终端预先存储PTRS端口0、PTRS端口1分别与2个被调度的DMRS端口之间的关联关系如下表：
表25 PTRS-DMRS关联关系

DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段包括MSB和LSB。其中，MSB用于指示PTRS端口0与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，LSB用于指示PTRS端口1与DMRS端口之间的关联关系。MSB、LSB分别为1比特。
S803.网络设备发送DCI。
相应地，终端接收该DCI。
该DCI用于指示至少一个第一PTRS端口与至少一个第一DMRS端口的关联关系。
例如，对于上述8流，PTRS端口数＝2中的第一情况，结合表19，例如，对于单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}，则共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口依次为{0,1,2,3}。假设PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“00”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“01”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“10”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1002；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“11”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1003。
又例如，对于单符号、Type2 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,4,5,12,13}，则PTRS-DMRS association字段可以为2比特，用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的是哪一个被调度的DMRS端口。假设PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“00”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“01”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“10”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1002；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“11”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1003。
此外，还可以确定与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口。与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以是预定义或预配置的DMRS端口。
例如，可以预定义与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以为第二码字CW1中端口号最小的DMRS端口。仍以上述单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}为例，可以确定与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口为DMRS端口1008。
又例如，可以预配置如表17所示的PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，可以通过PTRS-DMRS association字段的MSB指示与PTRS端口0关联的DMRS端口，通过PTRS-DMRS association字段的LSB指示与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口。
又例如，例如，对于上述8流，PTRS端口数＝2中的第二情况，结合表20，例如，对于单符号、Type1DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}，则共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口依次为{0,1,2}。假设PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“00”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“01”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“10”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1002。
又例如，对于单符号、Type2 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,4,5,12,13}，则PTRS-DMRS association字段可以为2比特，用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的是哪一个被调度的DMRS端口。假设PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“00”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“01”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“10”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1002；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“11”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1003。对于第一码字CW0的第4层发送的PUSCH端口7对应的PTRS端口1，与该PTRS端口1关联的是预设的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1013。
此外，还可以确定与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口。与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以是预定义或预配置的DMRS端口。
例如，可以预定义与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以为第二码字CW1中端口号最小的DMRS端口。仍以上述单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}为例，可以确定与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口为DMRS端口1003。
又例如，例如，对于上述8流，PTRS端口数＝2中的第三情况，结合表21，例如，对于单符号、Type1DMRS，扩容后的被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}，共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1}，假设MSB为“1”，则与PTRS端口0关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第2个被调度的DMRS端口， 即DMRS端口1001；共享PTRS端口1的被调度的DMRS端口为{10,11}，假设LSB为“0”，则与PTRS端口1关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第1个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1010。
此外，还可以确定与第二码字CW1的第1、2层发送的PUSCH端口2-3对应的PTRS端口0关联的DMRS端口。与该PTRS端口0关联的DMRS端口可以是预定义或预配置的DMRS端口。例如，可以预定义与该PTRS端口0关联的DMRS端口可以为第二码字CW1的第1、2层中对应的端口号最小的DMRS端口。仍以上述单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}为例，可以确定与该PTRS端口0关联的DMRS端口为DMRS端口1002。
还可以确定与第二码字CW1的第3、4层发送的PUSCH端口4-6对应的PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口。与该PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以是预定义或预配置的DMRS端口。例如，可以预定义与该PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以为第二码字CW1的第3、4层中端口号最小的DMRS端口。仍以上述单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}为例，可以确定与该PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口为DMRS端口1008。
针对上述6流的情况，结合表22，例如，对于单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9}，则共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口依次为{0,1,2}。假设PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“00”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“01”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“10”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1002。
又例如，对于单符号、Type2 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,4,5}，则PTRS-DMRS association字段可以为2比特，用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的是哪一个被调度的DMRS端口。假设PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“00”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“01”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“10”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1002。
此外，还可以确定与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口。与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以是预定义或预配置的DMRS端口。
例如，可以预定义与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以为第二码字CW1中端口号最小的DMRS端口。仍以上述单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9}为例，可以确定与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口为DMRS端口1003。
例如，针对上述4流的情况，结合表23，例如，对于单符号、Type1 DMRS，被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3}，共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1}，假设MSB为“1”，则与PTRS端口0关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第2个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1001；共享PTRS端口1的被调度的DMRS端口为{2,3}，假设LSB为“0”，则与PTRS端口1关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第1个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1002。
例如，对于上述8流，PTRS端口数＝4中的第一情况，结合表24，例如，对于单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}，则共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口依次为{0,1}。假设PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“0”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“1”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001。
又例如，对于单符号、Type2 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,4,5,12,13}，则共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口依次为{0,1}。PTRS-DMRS association字段可以为1比特，用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的是哪一个被调度的DMRS端口。假设PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“0”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“1”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001。
对于第一码字CW0的1层发送的PUSCH端口2对应的PTRS端口1，与该PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口为预设端口1002。
对于第一码字CW0的1层发送的PUSCH端口7对应的PTRS端口3，与该PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口为预设端口1011。
此外，还可以确定与第二码字CW1对应的PTRS端口1～PTRS端口3分别关联的DMRS端口。与第二码字CW1对应的PTRS端口1～PTRS端口3分别关联的DMRS端口可以是预定义、预配置或根据默认规则得到的DMRS端口。
又例如，例如，对于上述8流，PTRS端口数＝4中的第二情况，结合表25，例如，对于单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后的被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}，共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1}，假设MSB为“0”，则与PTRS端口0关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第2个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1000；假设MSB为“1”，则与PTRS端口0关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第2个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1001。共享PTRS端口1的被调度的DMRS端口为{2,3}，假设LSB为“0”，则与PTRS端口1关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第1个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1002；假设LSB为“1”，则与PTRS端口1关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第1个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1003。
S804.终端根据DCI从至少一个第一DMRS端口中确定与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口。
终端接收到DCI后，获取该DCI中的上行PUSCH的秩和TPMI后，确定预编码矩阵。并基于确定的预编码矩阵，根据码字指示信息，确定第一码字、与第一码字对应的至少一个第一PTRS端口。然后，根据DCI确定从至少一个DMRS端口中与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口。具体的示例可参考前述描述。
进一步地，终端还可以根据确定的第一DMRS端口的索引、当次调度的MCS、当次调度的RB个数中的至少一项，确定PTRS信号的时频资源位置和PTRS信号序列。
具体地，网络设备可以配置终端当次调度的MCS，终端可以根据当次调度的MCS以及上述表8，确定PTRS信号的时域密度。进一步地，根据PTRS信号的时域密度和PTRS信号对应的时域位置l的取值公式，确定PTRS信号对应的时域位置l。
网络设备可以配置终端当次调度的RB个数，终端可以根据当次调度的RB个数以及上述表9，确定PTRS信号的频域密度。进一步地，根据PTRS信号的频域密度和PTRS信号对应的频域位置k的取值公式(公式7)，确定PTRS信号对应的频域位置k。
终端进一步根据PTRS信号对应的时域位置l和频域位置k，以及根据公式6，确定PTRS信号的时频资源位置。
PTRS信号与DMRS信号对应的基序列相同，即只包含DMRS信号生成公式(即上述公式5)中对应的r(2n+k′)，不包含时频掩码wf(k′)和wt(l′)。
示例性地，上述码字指示信息可以与该DCI是独立的信息，或者上述码字指示信息也可以与该DCI位于第一信息中，终端根据第一信息从至少一个第一DMRS端口中确定与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口。
S805.终端根据与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，通过至少一个第一PTRS端口发送至少一个PTRS信号。
相应地，网络设备接收该至少一个PTRS信号。
终端根据与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，在相应的第一PTRS端口发送PTRS信号。此外，终端还可以根据与至少一个第二PTRS端口各自关联的第二DMRS端口，在相应的第二PTRS端口发送PTRS信号。
示例性地，上述PTRS-DMRS关联关系用于确定PTRS信号的序列和时频资源资源，具体发送行为还是根据PTRS端口对应的序列和时频资源发送，跟DMRS端口无关。
根据本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法，可以准确地确定PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，提高了通信的可靠性。
如图13所示，为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的流程示意图。示例性地，该方法可以包括以下步骤：
S1301.网络设备发送RRC信令。
相应地，终端接收该RRC信令。
该RRC信令用于配置以下至少一个信息：上行PUSCH传输模式(包括基于码本的传输模式(Full/Partial/Non-coherent)和基于非码本的传输模式)，上行最大的PTRS端口数、终端当前的PTRS端口、PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的子载波偏移量、MCS阈值范围、RB阈值范围、PUSCH端口数、天线相干组数。具体配置方法可以参考上述实施例中的步骤S401。
对于上行8T的终端，PTRS端口数可以有如下几种情况：
情况(1)：Ng＝1，PTRS端口数＝1；
情况(2)：Ng＝2，PTRS端口数＝1；
情况(3)：Ng＝2，PTRS端口数＝2；
情况(4)：Ng＝4，PTRS端口数＝2；
情况(5)：Ng＝4，PTRS端口数＝4。
下面基于上述PTRS端口数量的5种情况来分别讨论在最大8端口下，PTRS-DMRS关联关系确定方法。当然本申请不限于8T，也可以是1～7T，下面以8T为例进行描述，对于其它T的情况根据该方法类似确定。对应上述三种基于码本的上行传输模式，其PUSCH预编码矩阵有可以以如下的形式表示。
首先介绍三种PUSCH传输模式对应的TPMI形态。对于上行8天线的PUSCH传输模式，预编码矩阵可以是Nt×NL的矩阵，Nt是发送天线数，NL是上行传输层数。
1)Full coherent传输模式
以下列预编码矩阵举例。介绍8天线8层的Full coherent码本实现方式。
其中，预编码矩阵第x行第y列的元素表示为ax,y，这里ax,y可以为模为1的实数，其具体取值常见的有{1，-1，j，-j}；为预编码矩阵的功率系数，可以用于保证每个PUSCH端口和每个预编码矩阵的功率相同。对于Full coherent码本，该Nt×NL的预编码矩阵中没有0元素。下列讨论到的码字中，预编码矩阵中的元素取值一般以1为例，这里不排除其他取值。
2)部分相干传输模式
其中，预编码矩阵第x行第y列的元素表示为ax,y，这里ax,y可以为模为1的实数，其具体取值常见的有{1，-1，j，-j}；为预编码矩阵的功率系数，可以用于保证每个PUSCH端口和每个预编码矩阵的功率相同。对于部分相干码本，该Nt×NL的预编码矩阵中没有0元素，对于部分相干码本，预编码矩阵中存在取值为0的元素。下列讨论到的码字中，预编码矩阵中的元素取值一般以1为例，这里不排除其他取值。
3)非相干传输模式
其中，预编码矩阵第x行第y列的元素表示为ax,y，这里为ax,y可以为模为1的实数，其具体取值常见的有{1，-1，j，-j}；为预编码矩阵的功率系数，可以用于保证每个PUSCH端口和每个预编码矩阵的功率相同。对于非相干码本，预编码矩阵中存在取值为0的元素。下列讨论到的码字中，预编码 矩阵中的元素取值一般以1为例，这里不排除其他取值。
对于上述全相干/部分相干/非相干码本形态，不限定同一个码字下列的顺序。
对于小于8层的场景，其码本是上述码本的子集。
下面以8流，PTRS端口数＝2为例进行示例性描述。
在一个示例中，终端根据上行PUSCH的秩和TPMI，确定预编码矩阵如图5a所示，其中，行依次对应PUSCH端口0-7，列依次对应上行传输层数/DMRS端口0-7，需要说明的是，这里的DMRS端口0-7表示的是DMRS端口在TPMI对应的预编码矩阵中的列相对顺序，即对应第0～7个DMRS端口，不指DCI指示的具体DMRS端口号。该预编码矩阵包括2个Ng(Ng0和Ng1)以及2个码字(CW0和CW1)。网络设备配置2个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1)。
对应该预编码矩阵，Ng数为2，终端可以上报终端支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数为1或2，这里以终端可以上报终端支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数M为2为例。可替换地，也可以是网络设备配置上行最大的PTRS端口数为2。
根据预定义规则，以如图5a所示的预编码矩阵为例，PUSCH端口0-3共享PTRS端口0，PUSCH端口4-7共享PTRS端口1。这里可以理解为，从物理上讲，PUSCH端口0-3对应的相位噪声通过PTRS端口0测量，PUSCH端口4-7对应的相位噪声通过PTRS端口1测量。可以理解的是，PTRS端口数＝2，采用如图5b所示的预编码矩阵时，可以按照本实施例示例的关联方法获取PTRS-DMRS的关联关系。
在该示例中，假设CW0对应的MCS大于CW1对应的MCS，即第一码字为CW0。
对于第一码字可能存在以下3种情况：
第一种情况为，第一码字CW0包括图9a所示的预编码矩阵的第0-3列，第二码字CW1包括图9a所示的预编码矩阵的第4-7列。则根据上述PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联关系，每个码字分别对应一个PTRS端口，即第一码字CW0对应PTRS端口0，第二码字CW1对应PTRS端口1。则第一码字CW0的4层发送的PUSCH端口0-3对应PTRS端口0，第二码字CW1的4层发送的PUSCH端口4-7对应PTRS端口1。
S1302.网络设备发送码字指示信息。
相应地，终端接收该码字指示信息。
示例性地，网络设备可以向终端发送DCI，该DCI包括码字指示信息。该DCI还可以包括上行PUSCH的秩。需要说明的是，本发明中的码字指示信息也可以是传输块指示信息，两者含义等价。
终端可以根据调度上行数据传输的DCI包含的码字指示信息确定该PUSCH传输对应的码字个数，这里的码字指示信息可以包括第二个码字的MCS，新传数据指示(new data indicator，NDI)和冗余版本(redundancy version，RV)中的至少一项；即如果存在第二码字对应的上述三个信息中的至少一项，则终端设备可以认为该PUSCH传输包含第二码字。
终端还可以根据上行PUSCH的秩确定码字的数量。例如上行PUSCH的秩小于或等于4，则确定需要1个码字；上行PUSCH的秩大于4且小于或等于8，则确定需要2个码字。
其中，TPMI对应一个预编码矩阵，该预编码矩阵包括X个PUSCH端口，以及Y个数据层，每个数据层对应一个DMRS端口，X大于4；或，X大于4且Y大于4。其中，X个PUSCH端口是终端上报的或网络设备配置的，X个PUSCH端口根据预定义规则与M个PTRS端口关联。例如，网络设备配置的是8个PUSCH/SRS端口，DCI指示的传输层数是5流，则该TPMI用于指示8行5列的预编码矩阵。
综合来说，终端可以根据上行PUSCH的秩和TPMI，确定预编码矩阵，从而确定至少一个PTRS端口。具体地，PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联可参考前述实施例的描述。
示例性地，对于支持Full-coherent PUSCH传输能力的场景，终端支持/网络设备配置的最大的PTRS端口数为1，此时Ng＝1，网络设备可以通过高层信令为终端配置1个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0)，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口0可以与PUSCH端口0-7关联。
示例性地，当Ng＝2时，网络设备配置或预定义Ng0对应PUSCH端口0-3，Ng1对应PUSCH端口4-7。本实施例对Ng与PUSCH端口的对应关系的描述仅为示例，并不作限定。终端支持/网络设备配置的最大的PTRS端口数为2，对于当次PUSCH传输，网络设备可以为终端配置2个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1)，且如图5a所示，PUSCH端口0-3对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口4-7对应另一个Ng，则根据预定义规则，PUSCH端口0-3可以共享PTRS端口0，PUSCH端口4-7可以共享PTRS端口0，1个Ng共享1个PTRS端口；对于当次PUSCH传输，网络设备也可以为终端配置1个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0)，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口0可以与PUSCH端口0-7关联，PTRS端口0对应2个Ng；或对于当次 PUSCH传输，网络设备还可以为终端配置两个PTRS端口中的任1个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0或PTRS端口1)，当配置PTRS端口0时，PUSCH端口0-3对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口0-3可以共享PTRS端口0，或当配置PTRS端口1时，PUSCH端口4-7对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口4-7可以共享PTRS端口1。
当Ng＝2时，网络设备也可以配置或预定义Ng0对应PUSCH端口0、2、4、6，Ng1对应PUSCH端口1、3、5、7。本实施例对Ng与PUSCH端口的对应关系的描述仅为示例，并不作限定。终端支持/网络设备配置的最大的PTRS端口数为2，对于当次PUSCH传输，网络设备可以为终端配置2个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1)，且如图5b所示，PUSCH端口0、2、4、6对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口1、3、5、7对应另一个Ng，则根据预定义规则，PUSCH端口0、2、4、6可以共享PTRS端口0，PUSCH端口1、3、5、7可以共享PTRS端口1，1个Ng共享1个PTRS端口。对于当次PUSCH传输，网络设备也可以为终端配置1个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0)，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口0可以与PUSCH端口0-7关联，PTRS端口0对应2个Ng；或对于当次PUSCH传输，网络设备还可以为终端配置两个PTRS端口中的任1个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0或PTRS端口1)，当配置PTRS端口0时，PUSCH端口0、2、4、6对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口0、2、4、6可以共享PTRS端口0，或当配置PTRS端口1时，PUSCH端口1、3、5、7对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口1、3、5、7可以共享PTRS端口1。
当Ng＝4时，终端支持/网络设备配置的最大的PTRS端口数为4。
例如，如图6a所示，Ng＝4，其中，PUSCH端口0-1属于Ng0，PUSCH端口2-3属于Ng1，PUSCH端口4-5属于Ng2，以及PUSCH端口6-7属于Ng4，网络设备给终端配置4个PTRS端口，1个PTRS端口对应1个Ng，则对于当次PUSCH传输，PUSCH端口0-1共享PTRS端口0，PUSCH端口2-3共享PTRS端口1，PUSCH端口4-5共享PTRS端口2，以及PUSCH端口6-7共享PTRS端口3。对于当次PUSCH传输，网络设备也可以为终端配置1个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0)，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口0可以与PUSCH端口0-7关联，PTRS端口0对应4个Ng；或对于当次PUSCH传输，网络设备还可以为终端配置四个PTRS端口中的任1个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0、1、2或3)，当配置PTRS端口0时，PUSCH端口0-1对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口0-1可以共享PTRS端口0；或当配置PTRS端口1时，PUSCH端口2-3对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口2-3可以共享PTRS端口1；或当配置PTRS端口2时，PUSCH端口4-5对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口4-5可以共享PTRS端口2；或当配置PTRS端口3时，PUSCH端口6-7对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口6-7可以共享PTRS端口3。
又例如，如图6b所示，Ng＝4，其中，PUSCH端口0、4属于Ng0，PUSCH端口1、5属于Ng1，PUSCH端口2、6属于Ng2，以及PUSCH端口3、7属于Ng4，网络设备给终端配置4个PTRS端口，1个PTRS端口对应1个Ng，则对于当次PUSCH传输，PUSCH端口0、4共享PTRS端口0，PUSCH端口1、5共享PTRS端口1，PUSCH端口2、6共享PTRS端口2，以及PUSCH端口3、7共享PTRS端口3。对于当次PUSCH传输，网络设备也可以为终端配置1个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0)，则根据预定义规则，PTRS端口0可以与PUSCH端口0-7关联，PTRS端口0对应4个Ng；或对于当次PUSCH传输，网络设备还可以为终端配置四个PTRS端口中的任1个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0、1、2或3)，当配置PTRS端口0时，PUSCH端口0、4对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口0、4可以共享PTRS端口0；或当配置PTRS端口1时，PUSCH端口1、5对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口1、5可以共享PTRS端口1；或当配置PTRS端口2时，PUSCH端口2、6对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口2、6可以共享PTRS端口2；或当配置PTRS端口3时，PUSCH端口3、7对应一个Ng，PUSCH端口3、7可以共享PTRS端口3。
本实施例适用于上行大于4个PUSCH/SRS端口和/或大于4流的场景。对于上行大于4流的场景，可能引入第二个码字。
对于存在两个或多个码字的场景，本实施例考虑将其中一个码字(第一码字)的一个或多个PUSCH传输层中每个传输层对应的DMRS端口作为可以关联PTRS端口的候选DMRS端口。
网络设备向终端发送码字指示信息。该码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，该码字指示信息包括该第一码字对应的MCS。此外，该码字指示信息还可以包括以下至少一个信息：新数据指示(new data indicator，NDI)，冗余版本(redundancy version，RV)。
示例性地，网络设备也可以向终端发送多组码字指示信息，每组码字指示信息包括每个码字对应的MCS。终端接收到多组码字指示信息后，可以选取多个码字中最大的MCS对应的码字作为第一码字。MCS最大，则基于该码字的一层或多层对应的DMRS端口发送PTRS信号的质量最好。
示例性的，当两个码字指示的MCS相等时，所述第一码字对应码字或指示信息中包含的第一个MCS对应的码字，或称为Codeword 0；或示例性的，当两个码字被指示的MCS相等时，所述第一码字对应码 字指示信息中包含的第二个MCS对应的码字，或称为Codeword 1；即两个码字指示的MCS相同时，通过预设一个默认的码字作为所述第一码字(称为预设规则1)；
并列地，示例性的，当MCS相等时，所述第一码字根据当次PUSCH传输对应的TPMI确定。具体的确定方法如下：(1)接收DCI，在该DCI中获取TPMI的指示信息，通过当次PUSCH传输的TPMI和码字信息，确定每个CW包含的PTRS端口数。这里码字信息主要指的是预定义的码字到层映射信息(codeword to layer mapping)，或当次通知的码字到层映射信息(2)确定包含的PTRS端口数较多的码字为第一码字(称为预设规则2)。对于预设规则2，下面举两个例子进行说明：
情况1)8发5流，PTRS端口数为2，Ng＝2，指示的TPMI对应的预编码矩阵如图14a所示。情况2)8发5流，PTRS端口数为2，Ng＝4，指示的TPMI对应的预编码矩阵如图14b所示。情况3)8发5流，PTRS端口数为4，Ng＝4，指示的TPMI对应的预编码矩阵如图14c所示。
对于情况1)，天线相干组Ng0传输PUSCH的3层(即第0、1、4列)，其中，对于Ng0传输的3层，CW0包含2层，CW1包含1层；天线相干组Ng1传输PUSCH的2层(即第2、3列)，对应CW1的2层。此时，假设PTRS端口0通过预定义的方式绑定了上行天线端口(PUSCH Antenna port){0,1,2,3}(即第0-3行)，即对应Ng0包含的上行天线端口；假设PTRS端口1通过预定义的方式绑定了上行天线端口{4,5,6,7}(即第4-7行)，即对应Ng1包含的上行天线端口。则通过TPMI和CW到层映射关系可以看出：
CW0对应的层(TPMI的第0,1列)包含(这里包含可以进一步解释为，作为候选DMRS端口)的PTRS端口为PTRS端口0；CW0对应第1个、第2个DMRS端口。第1个、第2个DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口0的候选DMRS端口。
CW1对应的层(TPMI的第2,3,4列)包含的PTRS端口为PTRS端口0和1，其中第2,3层对应的DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口1的候选DMRS端口，第4层对应的DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口0的候选DMRS端口。CW1对应第3个、第4个、第5个DMRS端口。其中，第3个、第4个DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口1的候选DMRS端口，第5个DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口0的候选DMRS端口。
综上对于CW0和CW1，若第一码字是CW0，则解决的是PTRS端口0的候选DMRS端口关联指示；若第一码字是CW1，则既可以指示PTRS端口0的候选DMRS端口关联指示，也可以指示PTRS端口1的候选DMRS端口关联指示。
故，根据预设规则2的定义，2个CW对应的MCS相等时，选择对应的DMRS端口包含更多PTRS端口的CW，此时选择CW1作为第一码字。之后的每个PTRS端口与对应的候选DMRS端口关联关系指示继续沿用第一码字选定后的实施例步骤进行。
对于情况2)，天线相干组Ng0传输PUSCH的2层(即第0、4列)，其中，对于Ng0传输的2层，CW0包含1层，CW1包含1层；天线相干组Ng1传输PUSCH的1层(即第1列)，对应CW0的1层；天线相干组Ng2传输PUSCH的1层(即第2列)，对应CW1的1层；天线相干组Ng3传输PUSCH的1层(即第3列)，对应CW1的1层。此时，假设PTRS端口0通过预定义的方式绑定了上行天线端口{0,1,2,3}(即第0-3行)，即对应Ng0和Ng1包含的上行天线端口；假设PTRS端口1通过预定义的方式绑定了上行天线端口{4,5,6,7}(即第4-7行)，即对应Ng2和Ng3包含的上行天线端口。则通过TPMI和CW到层映射关系可以看出：
CW0对应的层(TPMI的第0,1列)包含(这里包含可以进一步解释为，作为候选DMRS端口)的PTRS端口为PTRS端口0；CW0对应第1个、第2个DMRS端口。第1个、第2个DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口0的候选DMRS端口。
CW1对应的层(TPMI的第2,3,4列)包含的PTRS端口为PTRS端口0和1，其中第2,3层对应的DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口1的候选DMRS端口，第4层对应的DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口0的候选DMRS端口。CW1对应第3个、第4个、第5个DMRS端口。其中，第3个、第4个DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口1的候选DMRS端口，第5个DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口0的候选DMRS端口。
综上对于CW0和CW1，若第一码字是CW0，则解决的是PTRS端口0的候选DMRS端口关联指示；若第一码字是CW1，则既可以指示PTRS端口0的候选DMRS端口关联指示，也可以指示PTRS端口1的候选DMRS端口关联指示。
故，根据预设规则2的定义，2个CW对应的MCS相等时，选择对应的DMRS端口包含更多PTRS端口的CW，此时选择CW1作为第一码字。之后的每个PTRS端口与对应的候选DMRS端口关联关系指示继续沿用第一码字选定后的实施例步骤进行。
对于情况3)，天线相干组Ng0传输PUSCH的2层(即第0、4列)，其中，对于Ng0传输的2层， CW0包含1层，CW1包含1层；天线相干组Ng1传输PUSCH的1层(即第1列)，对应CW0的1层；天线相干组Ng2传输PUSCH的1层(即第2列)，对应CW1的1层；天线相干组Ng3传输PUSCH的1层(即第3列)，对应CW1的1层。此时，假设PTRS端口0通过预定义的方式绑定了上行天线端口{0,1}(即第0-1行)，即对应Ng0包含的上行天线端口；假设PTRS端口1通过预定义的方式绑定了上行天线端口{2,3}(即第2-3行)，即对应Ng1包含的上行天线端口；假设PTRS端口2通过预定义的方式绑定了上行天线端口{4,5}(即第4-5行)，即对应Ng2包含的上行天线端口；假设PTRS端口3通过预定义的方式绑定了上行天线端口{6,7}(即第6-7行)，即对应Ng3包含的上行天线端口。则通过TPMI和CW到层映射关系可以看出：
CW0对应的层(TPMI的第0,1列)包含(这里包含可以进一步解释为，作为候选DMRS端口)的PTRS端口为PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1；CW0对应第1个、第2个DMRS端口。第1个、第2个DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1的候选DMRS端口。
CW1对应的层(TPMI的第2,3,4列)包含的PTRS端口为PTRS端口0、2、3，其中第2层对应的DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口2的候选DMRS端口，第3层对应的DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口3的候选DMRS端口，第4层对应的DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口0的候选DMRS端口。CW1对应第3个、第4个、第5个DMRS端口。其中，第3个DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口2的候选DMRS端口，第4个DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口3的候选DMRS端口，第5个DMRS端口可以作为PTRS端口0的候选DMRS端口。
综上对于CW0和CW1，若第一码字是CW0，则解决的是PTRS端口0、1的候选DMRS端口关联指示；若第一码字是CW1，则既可以解决PTRS端口0的候选DMRS端口关联指示，也可以解决PTRS端口2、3的候选DMRS端口关联指示。
故，根据预设规则2的定义，2个CW对应的MCS相等时，选择对应的DMRS端口包含更多PTRS端口的CW，此时选择CW1作为第一码字。之后的每个PTRS端口与对应的候选DMRS端口关联关系指示继续沿用第一码字选定后的实施例步骤进行。
下面以8流，PTRS端口数＝2为例进行示例性描述。
在一个示例中，终端根据上行PUSCH的传输层和TPMI，确定预编码矩阵如图5a所示，其中，行依次对应PUSCH端口0-7，列依次对应上行传输层数/DMRS端口0-7。该预编码矩阵包括2个Ng(Ng0和Ng1)以及2个码字(CW0和CW1)。网络设备配置2个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1)。需要说明的是，如图5a所示的预编码矩阵是一个示例性说明，Partial-coherent的码字形式可以如S1301步骤(2)中介绍的所示，对应S1301步骤中介绍的TPMI形式，该实施例描述的PTRS-DMRS关联关系指示方法均可以支持。此外，对应所有上行PUSCH传输模式和TPMI形态下，PTRS端口数为2的场景也可以使用被实施例对应的流程进行PTRS-DMRS端口关联关系指示。
对应该预编码矩阵，Ng数为2，终端可以上报终端支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数为1或2，这里以终端可以上报终端支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数M为2为例。可替换地，也可以是网络设备配置上行最大的PTRS端口数为2。
根据预定义规则，以如图5a所示的预编码矩阵为例，PUSCH端口0-3共享PTRS端口0，PUSCH端口4-7共享PTRS端口1。这里可以理解为，从物理上讲，PUSCH端口0-3对应的相位噪声通过PTRS端口0测量，PUSCH端口4-7对应的相位噪声通过PTRS端口1测量。可以理解的是，PTRS端口数＝2，采用如图5b所示的预编码矩阵时，可以按照本实施例示例的关联方法获取PTRS-DMRS的关联关系。
对于第一码字可能存在以下3种情况：
第一种情况为，第一码字CW0包括图9a所示的预编码矩阵的第0-3列，第二码字CW1包括图9a所示的预编码矩阵的第4-7列。则根据上述PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联关系，每个码字分别对应一个PTRS端口，即第一码字CW0对应PTRS端口0，第二码字CW1对应PTRS端口1。则第一码字CW0的4层发送的PUSCH端口0-3对应PTRS端口0，第二码字CW1的4层发送的PUSCH端口4-7对应PTRS端口1。
网络设备预先配置或终端预先存储PTRS端口0与第一码字对应的最多4个被调度的DMRS端口之间的关联关系如下表26或表27：
表26 PTRS-DMRS association for UL PTRS port corresponding to the selected CW

表27对应所选码字中包含的上行PTRS端口的PTRS-DMRS关联
该取值是DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值。该PTRS-DMRS association字段可以为2比特，用于指示与第一码字(所选码字)中包含的PTRS端口关联的是哪一个被调度的DMRS端口。
第二种情况为，第一码字CW0包括图9b所示的预编码矩阵的第0-2列以及第7列，第二码字CW1包括图9b所示的预编码矩阵的第3-6列。
需要说明的是，如图9b所示的预编码矩阵是一个示例性说明，Partial-coherent的码字形式可以如S1301步骤(2)中介绍的所示，对应S1301步骤中介绍的TPMI形式，该实施例描述的PTRS-DMRS关联关系指示方法均可以支持。此外，对应所有上行PUSCH传输模式和TPMI形态下，PTRS端口数为2的场景也可以使用被实施例对应的流程进行PTRS-DMRS端口关联关系指示。
则根据上述PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联关系，两个码字各自均对应2个PTRS端口，即第一码字CW0对应PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1，第二码字CW1对应PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1。则第一码字CW0的其中3层发送的PUSCH端口0-2对应PTRS端口0，第一码字CW0的第4层发送的PUSCH端口7对应PTRS端口1；第二码字CW1的第1层发送的PUSCH端口3对应PTRS端口0，第二码字CW1的第2-4层发送的PUSCH端口4-6对应PTRS端口1。
在该情况中，对于第一码字CW0的第4层发送的PUSCH端口7对应的PTRS端口1，与该PTRS端口1关联的是预设的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1011。对于第一码字CW0的其中3层发送的PUSCH端口0-2对应的PTRS端口0，网络设备预先配置或终端预先存储PTRS端口0与3个被调度的DMRS端口之间的关联关系如下表28或表29：
表28 PTRS-DMRS association for UL PTRS port corresponding to the selected CW
表29对应所选码字中包含的上行PTRS端口的PTRS-DMRS关联
此场景下表格对应4个取值时，网络设备下发的DCI信令中可以不指示到value＝3。
该取值是DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值。该PTRS-DMRS association字段可以为2比特，用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的是哪一个被调度的DMRS端口。
第三种情况为，第一码字CW0包括图9c所示的预编码矩阵的第0-1列以及第6-7列，第二码字CW1包括图9c所示的预编码矩阵的第2-5列。
需要说明的是，如图9c所示的预编码矩阵是一个示例性说明，Partial-coherent的码字形式可以如S1301步骤(2)中介绍的所示，对应S1301步骤中介绍的TPMI形式，该实施例描述的PTRS-DMRS关联关系指示方法均可以支持。此外，对应所有上行PUSCH传输模式和TPMI形态下，PTRS端口数为2的场景也可以使用被实施例对应的流程进行PTRS-DMRS端口关联关系指示。
则根据上述PTRS端口与PUSCH端口之间的关联关系，两个码字各自均对应2个PTRS端口，即第一码字CW0对应PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1，第二码字CW1对应PTRS端口0和PTRS端口1。则第一码字CW0的其中第1、2层发送的PUSCH端口0-1对应PTRS端口0，第一码字CW0的第3、4层发送的PUSCH端口6、7对应PTRS端口1；第二码字CW1的第1、2层发送的PUSCH端口2-3对应PTRS端口0，第二码字CW1的第3、4层发送的PUSCH端口4-6对应PTRS端口1。
在该情况下，对于第一码字CW0的其中第1、2层发送的PUSCH端口0-1对应的PTRS端口0，以及对于第一码字CW0的第3、4层发送的PUSCH端口6、7对应PTRS端口1，网络设备预先配置或终端预先存储PTRS端口0与2个被调度的DMRS端口之间的关联关系、以及PTRS端口1与2个被调度的DMRS端口之间的关联关系如下表30或表31：
表30 PTRS-DMRS association for UL PTRS port 0and 1
表31上行PTRS端口0和端口1的PTRS-DMRS关联
DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段包括MSB和LSB。其中，MSB用于指示PTRS端口0与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，LSB用于指示PTRS端口1与DMRS端口之间的关联关系。MSB、LSB分别为1比特。
在上述3种情况中，可以看出，在大于4流的场景下，DCI的指示开销相比现有的4流的场景并没有增加，从而DCI的指示开销较小。
本实施例还可以用于Full-coherent PUSCH传输模式，如下表32-表35：
下面以8流，PTRS端口数＝11为例进行示例性描述。
在一个示例中，终端根据上行PUSCH的传输层和TPMI，确定预编码矩阵如步骤S1301中的第1)部分Full coherent传输模式所示，其中，行依次对应PUSCH端口0-7，列依次对应上行传输层数/DMRS端口0-7。该预编码矩阵包括1个Ng(Ng0)以及2个码字(CW0和CW1)。网络设备配置1个PTRS端口(PTRS端口0)对应该预编码矩阵，Ng数为1，终端可以上报终端支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数为1，这里以终端可以上报终端支持的上行最大的PTRS端口数M为1为例。
根据预定义规则，以如图5a所示的预编码矩阵为例，PUSCH端口0-7共享PTRS端口0。这里可以理解为，从物理上讲，PUSCH端口0-7对应的相位噪声通过PTRS端口0测量。可以理解的是，PTRS端口数＝1，采用如如步骤S1301中的第1)部分Full coherent传输模式所示的预编码矩阵时，可以按照本实施例示例的关联方法获取PTRS-DMRS的关联关系。
本实施例适用于上行大于4个PUSCH/SRS端口和/或大于4流的场景。对于上行大于4流的场景，可能引入第二个码字。
对于存在两个或多个码字的场景，本实施例考虑将其中一个码字(第一码字)的一个或多个PUSCH传输层中每个传输层对应的DMRS端口作为可以关联PTRS端口的候选DMRS端口。
网络设备向终端发送码字指示信息。该码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，该码字指示信息包括该第一码字对应的MCS。此外，该码字指示信息还可以包括以下至少一个信息：新数据指示(new data indicator，NDI)，冗余版本(redundancy version，RV)。
示例性地，网络设备也可以向终端发送多组码字指示信息，每组码字指示信息包括每个码字对应的MCS。终端接收到多组码字指示信息后，可以选取多个码字中最大的MCS对应的码字作为第一码字。MCS 最大，则基于该码字的一层或多层对应的DMRS端口发送PTRS信号的质量最好。
示例性的，当两个码字指示的MCS相等时，所述第一码字对应码字或指示信息中包含的第一个MCS对应的码字，或称为Codeword 0；或示例性的，当两个码字被指示的MCS相等时，所述第一码字对应码字指示信息中包含的第二个MCS对应的码字，或称为Codeword 1；即两个码字指示的MCS相同时，通过预设一个默认的码字作为所述第一码字(称为预设规则1)；
并列地，示例性的，当MCS相等时，所述第一码字根据当次PUSCH传输对应的TPMI确定。具体的确定方法如下：(1)接收DCI，在该DCI中获取TPMI的指示信息，通过当次PUSCH传输的TPMI和码字信息，确定每个CW包含的PTRS端口数。这里码字信息主要指的是预定义的码字到层映射信息(codeword to layer mapping)，或当次通知的码字到层映射信息(2)确定包含的PTRS端口数较多的码字为第一码字(称为预设规则2)。
对于Full-coherent PUSCH传输模式，具体的DCI中的PTRS-DMRS association字段可以如下表32-表35：
表32 PTRS-DMRS association for UL PTRS port 0
表33上行PTRS端口0的PTRS-DMRS关联
表34 PTRS-DMRS association for UL PTRS port 0
表35上行PTRS端口0的PTRS-DMRS关联
S1303.网络设备发送PTRS-DMRS关联关系指示信息。
相应地，终端接收该PTRS-DMRS关联关系指示信息。
其中，该PTRS-DMRS关联关系指示信息可以包含于DCI。
例如，对于上述8流，PTRS端口数＝2中的第一情况，结合表19，例如，对于单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}，则共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口依次为{0,1,2,3}。假设PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“00”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“01”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“10”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1002；PTRS-DMRS association字 段的取值为“11”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1003。
又例如，对于单符号、Type2 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,4,5,12,13}，则PTRS-DMRS association字段可以为2比特，用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的是哪一个被调度的DMRS端口。假设PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“00”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“01”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“10”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1002；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“11”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1003。
此外，还可以确定与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口。与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以是预定义或预配置的DMRS端口。
例如，可以预定义与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以为第二码字CW1中端口号最小的DMRS端口。仍以上述单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}为例，可以确定与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口为DMRS端口1008。
又例如，可以预配置如表17所示的PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，可以通过PTRS-DMRS association字段的MSB指示与PTRS端口0关联的DMRS端口，通过PTRS-DMRS association字段的LSB指示与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口。
又例如，例如，对于上述8流，PTRS端口数＝2中的第二情况，结合表20，例如，对于单符号、Type1DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}，则共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口依次为{0,1,2}。假设PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“00”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“01”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“10”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1002。
又例如，对于单符号、Type2 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,4,5,12,13}，则PTRS-DMRS association字段可以为2比特，用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的是哪一个被调度的DMRS端口。假设PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“00”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“01”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“10”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1002；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“11”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1003。对于第一码字CW0的第4层发送的PUSCH端口7对应的PTRS端口1，与该PTRS端口1关联的是预设的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1013。
此外，还可以确定与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口。与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以是预定义或预配置的DMRS端口。
例如，可以预定义与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以为第二码字CW1中端口号最小的DMRS端口。仍以上述单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}为例，可以确定与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口为DMRS端口1003。
又例如，例如，对于上述8流，PTRS端口数＝2中的第三情况，结合表21，例如，对于单符号、Type1DMRS，扩容后的被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}，共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1}，假设MSB为“1”，则与PTRS端口0关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第2个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1001；共享PTRS端口1的被调度的DMRS端口为{10,11}，假设LSB为“0”，则与PTRS端口1关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第1个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1010。
此外，还可以确定与第二码字CW1的第1、2层发送的PUSCH端口2-3对应的PTRS端口0关联的DMRS端口。与该PTRS端口0关联的DMRS端口可以是预定义或预配置的DMRS端口。例如，可以预定义与该PTRS端口0关联的DMRS端口可以为第二码字CW1的第1、2层中对应的端口号最小的DMRS端口。仍以上述单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}为例，可以确定与该PTRS端口0关联的DMRS端口为DMRS端口1002。
还可以确定与第二码字CW1的第3、4层发送的PUSCH端口4-6对应的PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口。与该PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以是预定义或预配置的DMRS端口。例如，可以预定义与该PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以为第二码字CW1的第3、4层中端口号最小的DMRS端口。仍以上述单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}为例，可以确定与该PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口为DMRS端口1008。
针对上述6流的情况，结合表22，例如，对于单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9}，则共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口依次为{0,1,2}。假设PTRS-DMRS association字 段的取值为“00”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“01”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“10”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1002。
又例如，对于单符号、Type2 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,4,5}，则PTRS-DMRS association字段可以为2比特，用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的是哪一个被调度的DMRS端口。假设PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“00”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“01”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“10”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1002。
此外，还可以确定与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口。与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以是预定义或预配置的DMRS端口。
例如，可以预定义与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口可以为第二码字CW1中端口号最小的DMRS端口。仍以上述单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9}为例，可以确定与PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口为DMRS端口1003。
例如，针对上述4流的情况，结合表23，例如，对于单符号、Type1 DMRS，被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3}，共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1}，假设MSB为“1”，则与PTRS端口0关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第2个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1001；共享PTRS端口1的被调度的DMRS端口为{2,3}，假设LSB为“0”，则与PTRS端口1关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第1个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1002。
例如，对于上述8流，PTRS端口数＝4中的第一情况，结合表24，例如，对于单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}，则共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口依次为{0,1}。假设PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“0”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“1”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001。
又例如，对于单符号、Type2 DMRS，扩容后被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,4,5,12,13}，则共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口依次为{0,1}。PTRS-DMRS association字段可以为1比特，用于指示与PTRS端口0关联的是哪一个被调度的DMRS端口。假设PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“0”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1000；PTRS-DMRS association字段的取值为“1”，则与PTRS端口0关联的是DMRS端口1001。
对于第一码字CW0的1层发送的PUSCH端口2对应的PTRS端口1，与该PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口为预设端口1002。
对于第一码字CW0的1层发送的PUSCH端口7对应的PTRS端口3，与该PTRS端口1关联的DMRS端口为预设端口1011。
此外，还可以确定与第二码字CW1对应的PTRS端口1～PTRS端口3分别关联的DMRS端口。与第二码字CW1对应的PTRS端口1～PTRS端口3分别关联的DMRS端口可以是预定义、预配置或根据默认规则得到的DMRS端口。
又例如，例如，对于上述8流，PTRS端口数＝4中的第二情况，结合表25，例如，对于单符号、Type1 DMRS，扩容后的被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1,2,3,8,9,10,11}，共享PTRS端口0的被调度的DMRS端口为{0,1}，假设MSB为“0”，则与PTRS端口0关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第2个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1000；假设MSB为“1”，则与PTRS端口0关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第2个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1001。共享PTRS端口1的被调度的DMRS端口为{2,3}，假设LSB为“0”，则与PTRS端口1关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第1个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1002；假设LSB为“1”，则与PTRS端口1关联的被调度的DMRS端口为第1个被调度的DMRS端口，即DMRS端口1003。
S1304.终端根据DCI从至少一个第一DMRS端口中确定与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口。
终端接收到DCI后，获取该DCI中的上行PUSCH的秩和TPMI后，确定预编码矩阵。并基于确定的预编码矩阵，根据码字指示信息，确定第一码字、与第一码字对应的至少一个第一PTRS端口。然后，根据DCI确定从至少一个DMRS端口中与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口。具体的示例可参考前述描述。
进一步地，终端还可以根据确定的第一DMRS端口的索引、当次调度的MCS、当次调度的RB个数 中的至少一项，确定PTRS信号的时频资源位置和PTRS信号序列。
具体地，网络设备可以配置终端当次调度的MCS，终端可以根据当次调度的MCS以及上述表8，确定PTRS信号的时域密度。进一步地，根据PTRS信号的时域密度和PTRS信号对应的时域位置l的取值公式，确定PTRS信号对应的时域位置l。
网络设备可以配置终端当次调度的RB个数，终端可以根据当次调度的RB个数以及上述表9，确定PTRS信号的频域密度。进一步地，根据PTRS信号的频域密度和PTRS信号对应的频域位置k的取值公式(公式7)，确定PTRS信号对应的频域位置k。
终端进一步根据PTRS信号对应的时域位置l和频域位置k，以及根据公式6，确定PTRS信号的时频资源位置。
PTRS信号与DMRS信号对应的基序列相同，即只包含DMRS信号生成公式(即上述公式5)中对应的r(2n+k′)，不包含时频掩码wf(k′)和wt(l′)。
示例性地，上述码字指示信息可以与该DCI是独立的信息，或者上述码字指示信息也可以与该DCI位于第一信息中，终端根据第一信息从至少一个第一DMRS端口中确定与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口。
S1305.终端根据与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，通过至少一个第一PTRS端口发送至少一个PTRS信号。
相应地，网络设备接收该至少一个PTRS信号。
终端根据与至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，在相应的第一PTRS端口发送PTRS信号。此外，终端还可以根据与至少一个第二PTRS端口各自关联的第二DMRS端口，在相应的第二PTRS端口发送PTRS信号。
示例性地，上述PTRS-DMRS关联关系用于确定PTRS信号的序列和时频资源，具体发送行为还是根据PTRS端口对应的序列和时频资源发送，跟DMRS端口无关。
根据本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法，可以准确地确定PTRS端口与DMRS端口之间的关联关系，提高了通信的可靠性。
可以理解的是，为了实现上述实施例中的功能，终端、网络设备包括了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到，结合本申请中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及方法步骤，本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件相结合的形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用场景和设计约束条件。
图15-图18为本申请的实施例提供的可能的通信装置的结构示意图。这些通信装置可以用于实现上述方法实施例中终端或网络设备的功能，因此也能实现上述方法实施例所具备的有益效果。
如图15所示，为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图，该通信装置1300包括收发单元1301和处理单元1302。
该通信装置1300用于实现如图4所示的方法实施例中终端的功能时，收发单元1301用于执行如图4所示实施例中的步骤S401、S402和S404中终端的操作，以及处理单元1302用于执行如图4所示实施例中的步骤S403。
该通信装置1300用于实现如图4所示的方法实施例中网络设备的功能时，收发单元1301用于执行如图4所示实施例中的步骤S401、S402和S404中网络设备的操作。
该通信装置1300用于实现如图8所示的方法实施例中终端的功能时，收发单元1301用于执行如图8所示实施例中的步骤S801-S803和S805中终端的操作，以及处理单元1302用于执行如图8所示实施例中的步骤S804。
该通信装置1300用于实现如图8所示的方法实施例中网络设备的功能时，收发单元1301用于执行如图8所示实施例中的步骤S801-S803和S805中网络设备的操作。
图16示出了一种简化的终端的结构示意图。为便于理解和图示方便，图16中，终端以手机作为例子。如图16所示，终端包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对终端进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置，例如触摸屏、显示屏，键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。示例性地，有些种类的终端可以不具有输入输出装置。
当发送数据时，处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带 信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器，处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明，图16中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端产品中，可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置，也可以是与处理器集成在一起，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
在本申请实施例中，可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端的接收单元和发送单元(也可以统称为收发单元)，将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端的处理单元。如图16所示，终端包括收发单元1401和处理单元1402。收发单元1401也可以称为接收/发送(发射)器、接收/发送机、接收/发送电路等。处理单元1402也可以称为处理器，处理单板，处理模块、处理装置等。该收发单元1401用于实现图15所示实施例中收发单元1301的功能；该处理单元1402用于实现图15所示实施例中处理单元1302的功能。
图17示出了一种简化的网络设备的结构示意图。网络设备包括射频信号收发及转换部分以及1502部分，该射频信号收发及转换部分又包括收发单元1501部分。射频信号收发及转换部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换；1502部分主要用于基带处理，对网络设备进行控制等。收发单元1501也可以称为接收/发送(发射)器、接收/发送机、接收/发送电路等。1502部分通常是网络设备的控制中心，通常可以称为处理单元，用于控制网络设备执行上述图4或图8中关于网络设备所执行的步骤。具体可参见上述相关部分的描述。收发单元1501可用于实现图15所示实施例中收发单元1301的功能，1502部分用于实现图15所示实施例中处理单元1302的功能。
1502部分可以包括一个或多个单板，每个单板可以包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器，处理器用于读取和执行存储器中的程序以实现基带处理功能以及对网络设备的控制。若存在多个单板，各个单板之间可以互联以增加处理能力。作为一种可选的实施方式，也可以是多个单板共用一个或多个处理器，或者是多个单板共用一个或多个存储器，或者是多个单板同时共用一个或多个处理器。
如图18所示，为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的结构示意图，通信装置1600包括处理器1601和接口电路1602。处理器1601和接口电路1602之间相互耦合。可以理解的是，接口电路1602可以为收发器或输入输出接口。可选的，通信装置1600还可以包括存储器1603，用于存储处理器1601执行的指令或存储处理器1601运行指令的输入数据或存储处理器1601运行指令后产生的数据。
当通信装置1600用于实现图4或图8所示的方法时，处理器1601用于实现上述处理单元1302的功能，接口电路1602用于实现上述收发单元1301的功能。
当上述通信装置为应用于终端的芯片时，该芯片用于实现上述方法实施例中终端的功能。该芯片从终端中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收信息，该信息是网络设备或其它设备发送给终端的；或者，该芯片向终端中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)发送信息，该信息是终端发送给网络设备或其它设备的。
当上述通信装置为应用于网络设备的芯片时，该芯片用于实现上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。该芯片从网络设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收信息，该信息是终端或其它设备发送给网络设备的；或者，该芯片向网络设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)发送信息，该信息是网络设备发送给终端或其它设备的。
可以理解的是，本申请的实施例中的处理器可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)，还可以是其它通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其它可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件，硬件部件或者其任意组合。通用处理器可以是微处理器，也可以是任何常规的处理器。
根据本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置，实现了大于4流的DMRS端口的指示。
本申请的实施例中的方法步骤可以通过硬件的方式来实现，也可以由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成，软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器、闪存、只读存储器、可编程只读存储器、可擦除可编程只读存储器、电可擦除可编程只读存储器、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory，CD-ROM)或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器，从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息，且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然，存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外，该ASIC可以位于第一节点中。当然，处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于终端中。
本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统，包括上述通信装置。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，该程序或指令被处 理器执行时，使得上述实施例所述的方法被执行。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品，当其在计算设备上执行时，使得上述实施例所述的方法被执行。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机程序或指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序或指令时，全部或部分地执行本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、终端或者其它可编程装置。所述计算机程序或指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机程序或指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线或无线方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是集成一个或多个可用介质的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质，例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带；也可以是光介质，例如，数字视频光盘；还可以是半导体介质，例如，固态硬盘。
在本申请的各个实施例中，如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突，不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用，不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。
本申请中，“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A，B可以是单数或者复数。在本申请的文字描述中，字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系；在本申请的公式中，字符“/”，表示前后关联对象是一种“相除”的关系。
可以理解的是，在本申请的实施例中涉及的各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分，并不用来限制本申请的实施例的范围。上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定。

Claims (71)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    终端接收下行控制信息DCI，所述DCI包含相位追踪参考信号-解调参考信号PTRS-DMRS关联关系的指示，所述PTRS-DMRS关联关系用于指示第一PTRS端口与第一DMRS端口的关联关系，所述第一DMRS端口为第一码字对应的DMRS端口；所述PTRS-DMRS关联关系还用于指示第二PTRS端口与第二DMRS端口的关联关系，所述第二DMRS端口为第二码字对应的DMRS端口；
    所述终端根据与所述第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口，通过所述第一PTRS端口发送第一PTRS信号；
    所述终端根据与所述第二PTRS端口关联的第二DMRS端口，通过所述第二PTRS端口发送所述第二PTRS信号。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端上报所述终端支持的M个PTRS端口；或所述终端接收来自网络设备的第一信息，所述第一信息用于配置所述M个PTRS端口，所述M为正整数；
    所述第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述M，所述第二PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述M。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一PTRS端口和第二PTRS端口的数量和为所述M。
  4. 如权利要求1-3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述终端接收码字指示信息，所述码字指示信息用于指示所述第一码字，所述第一码字与所述第一PTRS端口对应。
  5. 如权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述码字指示信息还用于指示第二码字，所述第二码字与第二PTRS端口对应。
  6. 如权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端接收第一传输预编码矩阵索引TPMI指示信息，所述第一码字对应第一天线端口组传输的至少一个上行层，所述PTRS-DMRS关联关系用于指示第一PTRS端口与所述第一天线端口组传输的至少一个上行层中的第lL1层相关联，所述L1为预编码矩阵中所述第一PTRS端口对应的第L1层，所述L1为大于或等于0的整数。
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一天线端口组包含PUSCH天线端口{0,1,4,5}。
  8. 如权利要求1-7中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端接收第二TPMI指示信息，所述第二码字对应第二天线端口组传输的至少一个上行层，所述PTRS-DMRS关联关系用于指示第二PTRS端口与所述第二天线端口组传输的至少一个上行层中的第L2层相关联，所述L2为预编码矩阵中所述第二PTRS端口对应的第L2层，所述L2为大于或等于0的整数。
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二天线端口组包含PUSCH天线端口{2,3,6,7}。
  10. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    网络设备发送下行控制信息DCI，所述DCI包含相位追踪参考信号-解调参考信号PTRS-DMRS关联关系的指示，所述PTRS-DMRS关联关系用于指示第一PTRS端口与第一DMRS端口的关联关系，所述第一DMRS端口为第一码字对应的DMRS端口；所述PTRS-DMRS关联关系还用于指示第二PTRS端口与第二DMRS端口的关联关系，所述第二DMRS端口为第二码字对应的DMRS端口；
    所述网络设备根据与所述第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口，通过所述第一PTRS端口接收第一PTRS信号；
    所述网络设备根据与所述第二PTRS端口关联的第二DMRS端口，通过所述第二PTRS端口接收所述 第二PTRS信号。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述网络设备接收所述终端上报的所述终端支持的M个PTRS端口；或发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于配置所述M个PTRS端口，所述M为正整数；
    所述第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述M，所述第二PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述M。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一PTRS端口和第二PTRS端口的数量和为所述M。
  13. 如权利要求10-12中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述网络设备发送码字指示信息，所述码字指示信息用于指示所述第一码字，所述第一码字与所述第一PTRS端口对应。
  14. 如权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述码字指示信息还用于指示第二码字，所述第二码字与第二PTRS端口对应。
  15. 如权利要求10-14中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述网络设备发送第一传输预编码矩阵索引TPMI指示信息，所述第一码字对应第一天线端口组传输的至少一个上行层，所述PTRS-DMRS关联关系用于指示第一PTRS端口与所述第一天线端口组传输的至少一个上行层中的第lL1层相关联，所述L1为预编码矩阵中所述第一PTRS端口对应的第L1层，所述L1为大于或等于0的整数。
  16. 如权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一天线端口组包含PUSCH天线端口{0,1,4,5}。
  17. 如权利要求10-16中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述网络设备发送第二TPMI指示信息，所述第二码字对应第二天线端口组传输的至少一个上行层，所述PTRS-DMRS关联关系用于指示第二PTRS端口与所述第二天线端口组传输的至少一个上行层中的第L2层相关联，所述L2为预编码矩阵中所述第二PTRS端口对应的第L2层，所述L2为大于或等于0的整数。
  18. 如权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二天线端口组包含PUSCH天线端口{2,3,6,7}。
  19. 如权利要求1-18中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一PTRS端口为PTRS端口0，所述第二PTRS端口为PTRS端口1，所述第一DMRS端口为共享PTRS端口0的第1、2、3、4个DMRS端口，所述第二DMRS端口为共享PTRS端口1的第1、2、3、4个的DMRS端口，所述PTRS-DMRS关联关系包括：
    最高有效位为第一取值时，共享PTRS端口0的DMRS端口为第1个DMRS端口；
    最高有效位为第二取值时，共享PTRS端口0的DMRS端口为第2个DMRS端口；
    最高有效位为第三取值时，共享PTRS端口0的DMRS端口为第3个DMRS端口；
    最高有效位为第四取值时，共享PTRS端口0的DMRS端口为第4个DMRS端口；
    最低有效位为第一取值时，共享PTRS端口1的DMRS端口为第1个DMRS端口；
    最低有效位为第二取值时，共享PTRS端口1的DMRS端口为第2个DMRS端口；
    最低有效位为第三取值时，共享PTRS端口1的DMRS端口为第3个DMRS端口；
    最低有效位为第四取值时，共享PTRS端口1的DMRS端口为第4个DMRS端口。
  20. 根据权利要求1-19中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述DCI还包括以下至少一个信息：上行物理上行共享信道PUSCH的秩，TPMI；
    所述方法还包括：
    所述终端根据所述上行PUSCH的秩和/或TPMI，确定与所述第一码字对应的第一PTRS端口。
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，所述TPMI对应一个预编码矩阵，所述预编码矩阵包括X个PUSCH/SRS端口，以及Y个数据层，每个数据层对应一个DMRS端口，所述X大于4，和/或所述Y大于4。
  22. 根据权利要求20或21所述的方法，其特征在于，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口是所述终端上报的或网络设备配置的，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口根据预定义规则与所述M个PTRS端口关联。
  23. 如权利要求1-22中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，天线端口组Ng＝2时，所述TPMI对应的预编码矩阵形式为：
    其中，预编码矩阵第x行第y列的元素表示为ax,y，这里ax,y可以为模为1的实数，其具体取值常见的有{1，-1，j，-j}；为预编码矩阵的功率系数，可以用于保证每个PUSCH端口和每个预编码矩阵的功率相同；对于部分相干码本，该Nt×NL的预编码矩阵中没有0元素，对于部分相干码本，预编码矩阵中存在取值为0的元素。
  24. 如权利要求1-22中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，天线端口组Ng＝4时，所述TPMI对应的预编码矩阵形式为：
    其中，预编码矩阵第x行第y列的元素表示为ax,y，这里ax,y可以为模为1的实数，其具体取值常见的有{1，-1，j，-j}；为预编码矩阵的功率系数，可以用于保证每个PUSCH端口和每个预编码矩阵的功率相同；对于部分相干码本，该Nt×NL的预编码矩阵中没有0元素，对于部分相干码本，预编码矩阵中存在取值为0的元素；
    其中，所述预编码矩阵的前4列对应第一码字，所述预编码矩阵的后4列对应第二码字。
  25. 根据权利要求1-24中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一码字还与至少一个天线相干组对应。
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M大于或等于2，所述第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述天线相干组的数量。
  27. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    终端接收码字指示信息，所述码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，所述第一码字与至少一个第一相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口对应；
    所述终端接收下行控制信息DCI，所述DCI用于指示所述至少一个第一相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口与至少一个第一DMRS端口之间的关联关系，所述至少一个第一DMRS端口为所述第一码字的对应的DMRS端口；
    所述终端根据与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，通过所述至少一个第一PTRS端口发送至少一个PTRS信号。
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端上报所述终端支持的M个PTRS端口；或所述终端接收来自网络设备的第一信息，所述第一信息用于配置所述M个PTRS端口，所述M为正整数；
    所述终端确定所述第一码字对应的至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述M。
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的方法，其特征在于，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量为所述M。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M>1，至少有一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，其余M-1个PTRS端口关联的DMRS端口是预设端口。
  31. 根据权利要求29或30所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M＝2，与两个第一PTRS端口中的一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，与所述两个第一PTRS端口中的另一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是预设端口。
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的方法，其特征在于，与两个第一PTRS端口中的另一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口的数量为1。
  33. 根据权利要求28所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一码字对应N个第一PTRS端口，所述N<所述M，第二码字对应R个第二PTRS端口，所述R＝所述M-所述N，所述N、R为正整数；
    所述终端确定与所述R个第二PTRS端口各自关联的第二DMRS端口，所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中预定义、预配置或默认规则得到的DMRS端口。
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的方法，其特征在于，所述N>1，至少有一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，其余N-1个PTRS端口关联的DMRS端口是预设端口。
  35. 根据权利要求33或34所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M＝4，所述N＝3，所述R＝1，与三个第一PTRS端口中的一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，与所述三个第一PTRS端口中的另外两个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是预设端口，与所述三个第一PTRS端口中的另外两个第一PTRS端口中的每个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口的数量均为1；或
    所述M＝4，所述N＝2，所述R＝2，与两个第一PTRS端口中的每个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的。
  36. 根据权利要求33-35中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中端口号最小的DMRS端口。
  37. 根据权利要求27-36中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述码字指示信息包括多个码字中每个码字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，所述第一码字为所述多个码字中最大的MCS对应的码字。
  38. 根据权利要求27-36中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述码字指示信息包括两个码字中每个码 字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，当所述两个码字对应的MCS相等时，所述第一码字为预设码字。
  39. 根据权利要求38所述的方法，其特征在于，所述两个码字分别为码字0和码字1，
    所述预设码字为所述码字0。
  40. 如权利要求27所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述码字指示信息为初传PUSCH对应的码字指示信息。
  41. 根据权利要求27-40中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述DCI还包括以下至少一个信息：上行物理上行共享信道PUSCH的秩，TPMI；
    所述方法还包括：
    所述终端根据所述上行PUSCH的秩和/或TPMI，确定与所述第一码字对应的至少一个第一PTRS端口。
  42. 根据权利要求41所述的方法，其特征在于，所述TPMI对应一个预编码矩阵，所述预编码矩阵包括X个PUSCH/SRS端口，以及Y个数据层，每个数据层对应一个DMRS端口，所述X大于4，和/或所述Y大于4。
  43. 根据权利要求42所述的方法，其特征在于，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口是所述终端上报的或网络设备配置的，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口根据预定义规则与所述M个PTRS端口关联。
  44. 根据权利要求28-43中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一码字还与至少一个天线相干组对应。
  45. 根据权利要求44所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M大于或等于2，所述第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述天线相干组的数量。
  46. 如权利要求28或29所述的方法，其特征在于，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口包括PTRS端口0，所述所选码字为第一码字，所述至少一个第一DMRS端口包括第1、2、3、4个调度的DMRS端口，所述M取值为1时，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口与至少一个第一DMRS端口之间的关联关系包括：
    所述DCI指示第一值时，与所选码字对应的DMRS端口为第1个调度的DMRS端口；
    所述DCI指示第二值时，与所选码字对应的DMRS端口为第2个调度的DMRS端口；
    所述DCI指示第三值时，与所选码字对应的DMRS端口为第3个调度的DMRS端口；
    所述DCI指示第四值时，与所选码字对应的DMRS端口为第4个调度的DMRS端口。
  47. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    网络设备发送码字指示信息，所述码字指示信息用于指示第一码字，所述第一码字与至少一个第一相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口对应；
    所述网络设备发送下行控制信息DCI，所述DCI用于指示至少一个第一相位追踪参考信号PTRS端口与所述至少一个第一DMRS端口之间的关联关系，所述至少一个第一DMRS端口为所述第一码字的一层或多层对应的DMRS端口；
    所述网络设备根据与所述至少一个第一PTRS端口各自关联的第一DMRS端口，通过所述至少一个第一PTRS端口接收至少一个PTRS信号。
  48. 根据权利要求47所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述网络设备接收终端上报的所述终端支持的M个PTRS端口；或
    所述网络设备发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于配置所述M个PTRS端口；
    其中，所述M为正整数。
  49. 根据权利要求48所述的方法，其特征在于，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口的数量为所述M。
  50. 根据权利要求49所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M>1，至少有一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，其余M-1个PTRS端口关联的DMRS端口是预设端口。
  51. 根据权利要求49或50所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M＝2，与两个第一PTRS端口中的一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，与两个第一PTRS端口中的另一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是预设端口。
  52. 根据权利要求51所述的方法，其特征在于，与两个第一PTRS端口中的另一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口的数量为1。
  53. 根据权利要求48所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一码字对应N个第一PTRS端口，所述N<所述M，第二码字对应R个第二PTRS端口，所述R＝所述M-所述N，所述N、R为正整数。
  54. 根据权利要求53所述的方法，其特征在于，所述N>1，至少有一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，其余N-1个PTRS端口关联的DMRS端口是预设端口。
  55. 根据权利要求53或54所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M＝4，所述N＝3，所述R＝1，与三个第一PTRS端口中的一个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的，与所述三个第一PTRS端口中的另外两个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是预设端口，与所述三个第一PTRS端口中的另外两个第一PTRS端口中的每个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口的数量均为1；或
    所述M＝4，所述N＝2，所述R＝2，与两个第一PTRS端口中的每个第一PTRS端口关联的第一DMRS端口是根据所述DCI确定的。
  56. 根据权利要求23-25中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二DMRS端口为所述第二码字中端口号最小的DMRS端口。
  57. 根据权利要求47-56中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述码字指示信息包括多个码字中每个码字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，所述第一码字为所述多个码字中最大的MCS对应的码字。
  58. 如权利要求47-56中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述码字指示信息包括两个码字中每个码字对应的调制与编码方案MCS，当所述两个码字对应的MCS相等时，所述第一码字为预设码字。
  59. 如权利要求58所述的方法，其特征在于，所述两个码字分别为码字0和码字1，
    所述预设码字为所述码字0。
  60. 如权利要求47所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述码字指示信息为初传PUSCH对应的码字指示信息。
  61. 根据权利要求48-57中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述DCI还包括以下至少一个信息：上行物理上行共享信道PUSCH的秩，TPMI；
    所述TPMI对应一个预编码矩阵，所述预编码矩阵包括X个PUSCH/SRS端口，以及Y个数据层，每个数据层对应一个DMRS端口，所述X大于4，和/或所述Y大于4。
  62. 根据权利要求61所述的方法，其特征在于，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口是所述终端上报的或网络设备配置的，所述X个PUSCH/SRS端口根据预定义规则与所述M个PTRS端口关联。
  63. 根据权利要求48-62中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一码字还与至少一个天线相干组对 应。
  64. 根据权利要求63所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M大于或等于2，所述第一PTRS端口的数量小于或等于所述天线相干组的数量。
  65. 如权利要求48或49所述的方法，其特征在于，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口包括PTRS端口0，所述所选码字为第一码字，所述至少一个第一DMRS端口包括第1、2、3、4个调度的DMRS端口，所述M取值为1时，所述至少一个第一PTRS端口与至少一个第一DMRS端口之间的关联关系包括：
    所述DCI指示第一值时，与所选码字对应的DMRS端口为第1个调度的DMRS端口；
    所述DCI指示第二值时，与所选码字对应的DMRS端口为第2个调度的DMRS端口；
    所述DCI指示第三值时，与所选码字对应的DMRS端口为第3个调度的DMRS端口；
    所述DCI指示第四值时，与所选码字对应的DMRS端口为第4个调度的DMRS端口。
  66. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括用于实现如权利要求1-65中任一项所述的方法的单元。
  67. 一种通信系统，其特征在于，包括第一通信装置和第二通信装置，所述第一通信装置包括用于执行如权利要求1-9、19-46中任一项所述的方法的模块，所述第二通信装置包括用于执行如权利要求10-26、47-65中任一项所述的方法的模块。
  68. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器、存储器以及存储在所述存储器上并在所述处理器上运行的指令，当所述指令被运行时，使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1-65中任一项所述的方法。
  69. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器，用于执行存储器中存储的程序，当所述程序被执行时，使得所述装置执行如权利要求1-65中任一项所述的方法。
  70. 根据权利要求69所述的装置，其特征在于，所述存储器位于所述装置之外。
  71. 一种计算机可读存储介质，包括指令，当其在计算机上运行时，如权利要求1-65中任一项所述的方法被执行。
PCT/CN2023/122596 2022-10-01 2023-09-28 通信方法、装置及存储介质 WO2024067807A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202211215724 2022-10-01
CN202211215724.9 2022-10-01
CN202310165426.1A CN117811626A (zh) 2022-10-01 2023-02-17 通信方法、装置及存储介质
CN202310165426.1 2023-02-17

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024067807A1 true WO2024067807A1 (zh) 2024-04-04

Family

ID=90420875

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/122596 WO2024067807A1 (zh) 2022-10-01 2023-09-28 通信方法、装置及存储介质

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117811626A (zh)
WO (1) WO2024067807A1 (zh)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110034904A (zh) * 2018-01-11 2019-07-19 维沃移动通信有限公司 相位跟踪参考信号关联指示及发送方法、网络设备和终端
CN113767594A (zh) * 2019-05-02 2021-12-07 Lg电子株式会社 在无线通信系统中发送和接收相位跟踪参考信号的方法及其设备
CN114765879A (zh) * 2021-01-15 2022-07-19 维沃移动通信有限公司 Pusch传输方法、装置、设备及存储介质
CN114982177A (zh) * 2019-11-08 2022-08-30 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Prts到dmrs端口关联

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110034904A (zh) * 2018-01-11 2019-07-19 维沃移动通信有限公司 相位跟踪参考信号关联指示及发送方法、网络设备和终端
CN113767594A (zh) * 2019-05-02 2021-12-07 Lg电子株式会社 在无线通信系统中发送和接收相位跟踪参考信号的方法及其设备
CN114982177A (zh) * 2019-11-08 2022-08-30 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Prts到dmrs端口关联
CN114765879A (zh) * 2021-01-15 2022-07-19 维沃移动通信有限公司 Pusch传输方法、装置、设备及存储介质

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117811626A (zh) 2024-04-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN109391413B (zh) 信息传输的方法和通信装置
US10887060B2 (en) Electronic device and communication method in a wireless communication system
JP2020513171A (ja) 位相追跡参照信号処理方法および装置
CN113824481B (zh) 上行传输方法、装置、芯片系统及存储介质
RU2679284C1 (ru) Способ беспроводной связи, узел enode b и пользовательское оборудование
US9642119B2 (en) Resource allocation in a wireless communication system
CN111435875B (zh) 发送和接收指示的方法和装置
JP7130747B2 (ja) 位相追従参照信号送信方法及び装置
JP6179825B2 (ja) 通信装置、通信方法及び集積回路
WO2019137058A1 (zh) 资源指示方法、终端设备和网络设备
TWI678113B (zh) 接收資料的方法、發射資料的方法及使用者設備
WO2019191970A1 (zh) 通信方法、通信装置和系统
WO2022068936A1 (zh) 参考信号的映射方法及装置
WO2024067807A1 (zh) 通信方法、装置及存储介质
WO2022205022A1 (zh) 用于传输参考信号的方法和装置
JP2013255047A (ja) 送信装置、受信装置、送信方法及び受信方法
CN111436129A (zh) 数据传输方法和通信装置
CN112887068B (zh) 数据传输方法、发送设备和接收设备
WO2024032351A1 (zh) Dmrs端口指示方法、装置及存储介质
WO2024032261A1 (zh) 序列生成方法及通信装置
WO2024032394A1 (zh) 一种通信方法和装置
WO2023207650A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
US20240114524A1 (en) Method of allocating resources based on varying-rank for uplink multi-user mimo antenna system, base station, and user equipment
WO2023159575A1 (zh) 通信方法、终端设备及网络设备
WO2022067811A1 (zh) 一种信号发送方法、接收方法、通信装置和存储介质

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23871032

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1